Commission Regulation (EC) No 692/2008 of 18 July 2008 implementing and amending Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 of the European Parliament and of the Council on type-approval of motor vehicles with respect to emissions from light passenger and commercial vehicles (Euro 5 and Euro 6) and on access to vehicle repair and maintenance information (Text with EEA relevance)
Date: 2008-07-18
Institutions: European Commission
Subjects: approval, commercial vehicle, general mechanical engineering, motor vehicle, motor vehicle pollution, pollution control measures, technical standard

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/1

I

(Acts adopted under the EC Treaty/Euratom Treaty whose publication is obligatory)

REGULATIONS

COMMISSION REGULATION (EC) No 692/2008

of 18 July 2008

implementing and amending Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 of the European Parliament and of the
Council on type-approval of motor vehicles with respect to emissions from light passenger and
commercial vehicles (Euro 5 and Euro 6) and on access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

(Text with EEA relevance)

THE COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES,

Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Commu-
nity, and in particular Article 95 thereof,

Having regard to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 of the European
Parliament and of the Council of 20 June 2007 on type-approval
of motor vehicles with respect to emissions from light passenger
and commercial vehicles (Euro 5 and Euro 6) and on access to
vehicle repair and maintenance information (1), and in particular
Articles 4(4), 5(3) and 8 thereof

Whereas:

(1)

(2)

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 is one of the separate regu-
latory acts under the type-approval procedure laid down
by Council Directive 70/156/EEC of 6 February 1970 on
the approximation of the laws of the Member States relat-
ing to the type-approval of motor vehicles and their
trailers (2).

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 requires new light-duty
vehicles to comply with new emission limits and makes
additional requirements on access to information. The
technical requirements take effect in two stages, Euro 5
starting from 1 September 2009 and Euro 6 from 1 Sep-
tember 2014. The specific technical provisions necessary
to implement that Regulation should be adopted. There-
fore, the present Regulation aims at setting the require-
ments necessary for the type-approval of Euro 5 and 6
specification vehicles.

(1) OJ L 171, 29.6.2007, p. 1.
(2) OJ L 42, 23.2.1970, p. 1 Directive as last amended by Regulation (EC)

No 715/2007

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

Article 5 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 provides for
specific technical requirements relating to the control of
emissions from vehicles to be set in its implementing leg-
islation. Therefore,
is appropriate to adopt such
requirements.

it

Following the adoption of the main requirements for type
approval in Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, it is necessary
to establish administrative provisions for EC type-approval
of light duty vehicles. These administrative requirements
include provisions for conformity of production and
in-service conformity to ensure continued good perfor-
mance of production vehicles.

In accordance with Article 11 of Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007, it is necessary to establish requirements for
type approval of replacement pollution control devices so
as to ensure that they function correctly.

In accordance with Articles 6 and 7 of Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007, it is also necessary to establish requirements
to ensure that vehicle on board diagnostic (OBD) and
vehicle repair and maintenance information is readily
accessible, so as to ensure that independent operators have
access to such information.

In accordance with Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, the
measures provided for in this Regulation regarding access
to vehicle repair and maintenance information, informa-
tion for diagnostic tools and the compatibility of replace-
ment parts with vehicle OBD systems, should not be
restricted to emissions-related components and systems
but cover all aspects of a vehicle subject to type-approval
within the scope of this Regulation.

L 199/2

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

(8)

(9)

As provided by Article 14(2) of Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007, recalibrated limit values for particulate mass
and new limit values for number of particles emitted are
introduced.

3.

‘gaseous pollutants’ means the exhaust gas emissions of car-
bon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen, expressed in nitrogen
dioxide (NO2) equivalent, and hydrocarbons with the follow-
ing ratio:

The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accor-
dance with the opinion of the Technical Committee —
Motor Vehicles established by Article 40 of Directive
2007/46/EC of the European Parliament and of the Coun-
cil of 5 September 2007 establishing a framework for the
approval of motor vehicles and their trailers, and of sys-
tems, components and separate technical units intended
for such vehicles (Framework Directive) (1).

(a) C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol (E5);

(b) C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel (B5);

(c) C1H2,525 for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG);

(d) CH4 for natural gas (NG) and biomethane;

(e) C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85);

(10) A Forum should be established to examine any concerns
raised regarding the implementation of section 2.2 of
Annex XIV, concerning access information relating to
vehicle security features. The information exchange in the
Forum should help to reduce the risk of misuse of vehicle
security information. Due to the sensitivity of the subject
matter it might be necessary to keep discussions and find-
ings of the Forum confidential.

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:

Article 1

Subject matter

This Regulation lays down measures for the implementation of
Articles 4, 5 and 8 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

Article 2

Definitions

For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions shall
apply:

1.

‘vehicle type with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and
maintenance information’ means a group of vehicles which
do not differ in the following respects:

(a)

the equivalent inertia determined in relation to the ref-
erence mass as provided for in paragraph 5.1 of Annex 4
of UN/ECE Regulation 83 (2);

(b)

the engine and vehicle characteristics as set out in
Appendix 3 of Annex I;

2.

‘EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and
vehicle repair and maintenance information’ means an EC
type-approval of a vehicle with regard to its tailpipe emis-
sions, crankcase emissions, evaporative emissions, fuel con-
sumption and access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and
maintenance information;

4.

‘starting aid’ means glow plugs, modifications to the injection
timing and other devices which assist the engine to start
without enrichment of the air/fuel mixture of the engine;

5.

‘engine capacity’ means either of the following:

(a)

for reciprocating piston engines, the nominal engine
swept volume;

(b)

for rotary piston (Wankel) engines, double the nominal
engine swept volume;

6.

7.

8.

‘periodically regenerating system’ means catalytic converters,
particulate filters or other pollution control devices that
require a periodical regeneration process in less than
4 000 km of normal vehicle operation

‘original replacement pollution control device’ means a pol-
lution control device or an assembly of pollution control
devices whose types are indicated in Appendix 4 to Annex I
to this Regulation but are offered on the market as separate
technical units by the holder of the vehicle type-approval;

‘type of pollution control device’ means catalytic converters
and particulate filters which do not differ in any of the fol-
lowing essential aspects:

(a) number of substrates, structure and material;

(b)

type of activity of each substrate;

(c) volume, ratio of frontal area and substrate length;

(d) catalyst material content;

(e)

catalyst material ratio;

(f)

cell density;

(g) dimensions and shape;

(h)

thermal protection;

(1) OJ L 263, 9.10.2007, p. 1.
(2) OJ L 375, 27.12.2006, p. 223.

9.

‘mono fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle that is designed to run
primarily on one type of fuel;

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/3

10.

‘mono fuel gas vehicle’ means a mono fuel vehicle that pri-
marily runs on LPG, NG/biomethane, or hydrogen but may
also have a petrol system for emergency purposes or starting
only, where the petrol tank does not contain more than
15 litres of petrol;

21.

‘secondary air’ means the air introduced into the exhaust sys-
tem by means of a pump or aspirator valve or other means
that is intended to aid in the oxidation of HC and CO con-
tained in the exhaust gas stream;

11.

‘bi fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle with two separate fuel stor-
age systems that can run part-time on two different fuels and
is designed to run on only one fuel at a time;

12.

‘bi fuel gas vehicle’ means a bi fuel vehicle that can run on
petrol and also on either LPG, NG/biomethane or hydrogen;

22.

‘driving cycle’, in respect of vehicle OBD systems, consists of
engine start-up, driving mode where a malfunction would be
detected if present, and engine shut-off;

23.

‘access to information’ means the availability of all vehicle
OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information,
required for the inspection, diagnosis, servicing or repair of
the vehicle.

13.

‘flex fuel vehicle’ means a vehicle with one fuel storage sys-
tem that can run on different mixtures of two or more fuels;

24.

14.

‘flex fuel ethanol vehicle’ means a flex fuel vehicle that can
run on petrol or a mixture of petrol and ethanol up to an
85 % ethanol blend (E85);

15.

‘flex fuel biodiesel vehicle’ means a flex fuel vehicle that can
run on mineral diesel or a mixture of mineral diesel and
biodiesel;

16.

‘hybrid electric vehicle (HEV)’ means a vehicle that, for the
purpose of mechanical propulsion, draws energy from both
of the following on-vehicle sources of stored energy/power:

(a) a consumable fuel;

(b) battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator or other electrical

energy/power storage device;

17.

‘properly maintained and used’ means, for the purpose of a
test vehicle, that such a vehicle satisfies the criteria for accep-
tance of a selected vehicle laid down in section 2 of Appen-
dix 1 to Annex II;

18.

‘emission control system’ means, in the context of the OBD
system, the electronic engine management controller and any
emission-related component in the exhaust or evaporative
system which supplies an input to or receives an output from
this controller;

19.

‘malfunction indicator (MI)’ means a visible or audible indi-
cator that clearly informs the driver of the vehicle in the
event of a malfunction of any emission-related component
connected to the OBD system, or of the OBD system itself;

20.

‘malfunction’ means the failure of an emission-related com-
ponent or system that would result in emissions exceeding
the limits in section 3.3.2 of Annex XI or if the OBD system
is unable to fulfil the basic monitoring requirements set out
in Annex XI;

‘deficiency’ means, in the context of the OBD system, that up
to two separate components or systems which are monitored
contain temporary or permanent operating characteristics
that impair the otherwise efficient OBD monitoring of those
components or systems or do not meet all of the other
detailed requirements for OBD;

25.

‘deteriorated replacement pollution control device’ means a
pollution control device as defined in Article 3(11) of Regu-
lation (EC) No 715/2007 that has been aged or artificially
deteriorated to such an extent that it fulfils the requirements
laid out in Section 1 to Appendix 1 to Annex XI of UN/ECE
Regulation No 83;

26.

‘vehicle OBD information’ means information relating to an
on-board diagnostic system for any electronic system on the
vehicle

27.

‘reagent’ means any product other than fuel that is stored
on-board the vehicle and is provided to the exhaust after-
treatment system upon request of the emission control
system;

28.

‘mass of the vehicle in running order’ means the mass
described in point 2.6 of Annex I to Directive 2007/46/EC;

29.

‘engine misfire’ means lack of combustion in the cylinder of
a positive ignition engine due to absence of spark, poor fuel
metering, poor compression or any other cause;

30.

‘cold start system or device’ means a system which tempo-
rarily enriches the air/fuel mixture of the engine thus assist-
ing the engine to start;

31.

‘power take-off operation or unit’ means an engine-driven
output provision for the purposes of powering auxiliary,
vehicle mounted, equipment;

32.

‘small volume manufacturers’ means vehicle manufacturers
whose worldwide annual production is less than 10 000
units.

L 199/4

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Article 3

Requirements for type-approval

The manufacturer shall ensure that for the Type 3 test set
8.
out in Annex V, the engine’s ventilation system does not permit
the emission of any crankcase gases into the atmosphere.

In order to receive an EC type-approval with regard to emis-
1.
sions and vehicle repair and maintenance information, the manu-
facturer shall demonstrate that the vehicles comply with the test
procedures specified in Annexes III to VIII, X to XII, XIV and XVI
to this Regulation. The manufacturer shall also ensure compliance
with the specifications of reference fuels set out in Annex IX to
this Regulation.

Vehicles shall be subject to the tests specified in Figure I.2.4

2.
of Annex I.

3.
As an alternative to the requirements contained in
Annexes II, III, V to XI and XVI, small volume manufacturers may
request the granting of EC type-approval to a vehicle type which
was approved by an authority of a third country on the basis of
the legislative acts set out in Section 2.1 of Annex I.

The emissions tests for roadworthiness purposes set out in
Annex IV, tests fuel consumption and CO2 emissions set out in
Annex XII and the requirements for access to vehicle OBD and
vehicle repair and maintenance information set out in Annex XIV
shall still be required to obtain EC type-approval with regard to
emissions and vehicle repair and maintenance information under
this paragraph.

The approval authority shall inform the Commission of the cir-
cumstances of each type approval granted under this paragraph.

4.
Specific requirements for inlets to fuel tanks and electronic
system security are laid down in Section 2.2 and 2.3 of Annex I.

5.
The manufacturer shall take technical measures so as to
ensure that the tailpipe and evaporative emissions are effectively
limited, in accordance with this Regulation, throughout the nor-
mal life of the vehicle and under normal conditions of use.

These measures shall include ensuring that the security of hoses,
joints and connections, used within the emission control systems,
are constructed so as to conform with the original design intent.

The manufacturer shall ensure that the emissions test results
6.
comply with the applicable limit value under the specified test
conditions of this Regulation.

For the Type 2 test set out in Appendix 1 to Annex IV, at
7.
normal engine idling speed, the maximum permissible carbon
monoxide content in the exhaust gases shall be that stated by the
vehicle manufacturer. However, the maximum carbon monoxide
content shall not exceed 0,3 % vol.

The Type 6 test measuring emissions at low temperatures

9.
set out in Annex VIII shall not apply to diesel vehicles.

However, when applying for type-approval, manufacturers shall
present to the approval authority with information showing that
the NOx aftertreatment device reaches a sufficiently high tempera-
ture for efficient operation within 400 seconds after a cold start
at – 7 °C as described in the Type 6 test.

In addition, the manufacturer shall provide the approval author-
ity with information on the operating strategy of the exhaust gas
recirculation system (EGR),
including its functioning at low
temperatures.

This information shall also include a description of any effects on
emissions.

The approval authority shall not grant type-approval if the infor-
mation provided is insufficient to demonstrate that the aftertreat-
ment device actually reaches a sufficiently high temperature for
efficient operation within the designated period of time.

At the request of the Commission, the approval authority shall
provide information on the performance of NOx aftertreatment
devices and EGR system at low temperatures.

Article 4

Requirements for type-approval regarding the
OBD system

The manufacturer shall ensure that all vehicles are equipped

1.
with an OBD system.

2.
The OBD system shall be designed, constructed and installed
on a vehicle so as to enable it to identify types of deterioration or
malfunction over the entire life of the vehicle.

The OBD system shall comply with the requirements of this

3.
Regulation during conditions of normal use.

4. When tested with a defective component in accordance with
Appendix 1 of Annex XI, the OBD system malfunction indicator
shall be activated.

The OBD system malfunction indicator may also activate during
this test at levels of emissions below the OBD thresholds limits
specified in Annex XI.

At high idle speed, the carbon monoxide content by volume of
the exhaust gases shall not exceed 0,2 %, with the engine speed
being at least 2 000 min-1 and Lambda being 1 ± 0,03 or in
accordance with the specifications of the manufacturer.

5.
The manufacturer shall ensure that the OBD system com-
plies with the requirements for in-use performance set out in sec-
tion 3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI of this Regulation under all
reasonably foreseeable driving conditions.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/5

In-use performance related data to be stored and reported
6.
by a vehicle’s OBD system according to the provisions of point 3.6
of Appendix 1 to Annex XI shall be made readily available by the
manufacturer to national authorities and independent operators
without any encryption.

7.
Vehicles shall only be type-approved to Euro 6 emission
standards once OBD thresholds have been introduced with the
exception of diesel vehicles using the OBD thresholds set out in
point 2.3.2 of Annex XI.

(f)

a description of the provisions taken to prevent tampering
with and modification of the emission control computer;

(g)

if applicable, the particulars of the vehicle family as referred
to in Appendix 2 to Annex XI;

(h) where appropriate, copies of other type-approvals with the
relevant data to enable extension of approvals and establish-
ment of deterioration factors.

Article 5

Application for EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard
to emissions and access to vehicle repair and
maintenance information

For the purposes of paragraph 3(d), the manufacturer shall
4.
use the model of a manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with
the OBD in-use performance requirements set out in Appendix 7
of Annex I

1.
The manufacturer shall submit to the approval authority an
application for EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emis-
sions and access to vehicle repair and maintenance information.

2.
The application referred to in paragraph 1 shall be drawn up
in accordance with the model of the information document set
out in Appendix 3 to Annex I.

In addition, the manufacturer shall submit the following

3.
information:

(a)

in the case of vehicles equipped with positive-ignition
engines, a declaration by the manufacturer of the minimum
percentage of misfires out of a total number of firing events
that either would result in emissions exceeding the limits
given in section 2.3 of Annex XI if that percentage of misfire
had been present from the start of a type 1 test as described
in Annex III to this Regulation or could lead to an exhaust
catalyst, or catalysts, overheating prior to causing irreversible
damage;

5.
For the purposes of paragraph 3(e), the approval authority
that grants the approval shall make the information referred to in
that point available to the approval authorities or the Commis-
sion upon request.

6.
For the purposes of points (d) and (e) of paragraph 3,
approval authorities shall not approve a vehicle if the informa-
tion submitted by the manufacturer is inappropriate for fulfilling
the requirements of section 3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI.

Sections 3.2, 3.3 and 3.7 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI shall apply
under all reasonably foreseeable driving conditions.

For the assessment of the implementation of the requirements set
out in the first and second subparagraphs, the approval authori-
ties shall take into account the state of technology.

(b) detailed written information fully describing the functional
operation characteristics of the OBD system, including a list-
ing of all relevant parts of the emission control system of the
vehicle that are monitored by the OBD system;

7.
For the purposes of paragraph 3(f), the provisions taken to
prevent tampering with and modification of the emission control
computer
include the facility for updating using a
manufacturer-approved programme or calibration.

shall

(c) a description of the malfunction indicator used by the OBD
system to signal the presence of a fault to a driver of the
vehicle;

(d) a declaration by the manufacturer that the OBD system com-
plies with the provisions of section 3 of Appendix 1 to
Annex XI relating to in-use performance under all reasonably
foreseeable driving conditions;

(e) a plan describing the detailed technical criteria and justifica-
tion for incrementing the numerator and denominator of
each monitor that must fulfil the requirements of sections 3.2
and 3.3 of Appendix 1 to Annex XI, as well as for disabling
numerators, denominators and the general denominator
under the conditions outlined in section 3.7 of Appendix 1
to Annex XI;

8.
For the tests specified in Figure I.2.4 of Annex I the manu-
facturer shall submit to the technical service responsible for the
type-approval tests a vehicle representative of the type to be
approved.

9.
The application for type-approval of mono fuel, bi-fuel and
flex-fuel vehicles shall comply with the additional requirements
laid down in Sections 1.1 and 1.2 of Annex I.

10.
Changes to the make of a system, component or separate
technical unit that occur after a type-approval shall not automati-
cally invalidate a type approval, unless its original characteristics
or technical parameters are changed in such a way that the func-
tionality of the engine or pollution control system is affected.

L 199/6

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Article 6

Administrative provisions for EC type-approval of a
vehicle with regard to emissions and access to vehicle
repair and maintenance information

The specific provisions concerning conformity of produc-
3.
tion are laid down in Section 4 of Annex I to this Regulation and
the relevant statistical methods in Appendices 1 and 2 to that
Annex.

1.
If all the relevant requirements are met, the approval author-
ity shall grant an EC type-approval and issue a type-approval
number in accordance with the numbering system set out in
Annex VII to Directive 2007/46/EC.

Article 9

In service conformity

Without prejudice to the provisions of Annex VII to Directive
2007/46/EC, section 3 of the type-approval number shall be
drawn up in accordance with Appendix 6 to Annex I to this
Regulation.

1.
The provisions for in-service conformity are laid down in
Annex II to this Regulation and, for vehicles type-approved under
Council Directive 70/220/EEC (1), in Annex XV to this Regulation.

An approval authority shall not assign the same number to
another vehicle type.

2. Measures to ensure in-service conformity of vehicles type-
approved under this Regulation or Directive 70/220/EEC shall be
taken in accordance with Article 12 of Directive 2007/46/EC.

2.
By way of derogation from paragraph 1, at the request of
the manufacturer, a vehicle with an OBD system may be accepted
for type-approval with regard to emissions and vehicle repair and
maintenance information, even though the system contains one
or more deficiencies such that the specific requirements of
Annex XI are not fully met, provided that the specific administra-
tive provisions set out in Section 3 of that Annex are complied
with.

The approval authority shall notify the decision to grant such a
type approval to all approval authorities in the other Member
States in accordance with the requirements set out in Article 8 of
Directive 2007/46/EC.

3. When granting an EC type approval under paragraph 1, the
approval authority shall issue an EC type-approval certificate
using the model set out in Appendix 4 to Annex I.

Article 7

Amendments to type-approvals

Articles 13, 14 and 16 of Directive 2007/46/EC shall apply to any
amendments to the type-approvals.

At the manufacturer’s request the provisions specified in Section 3
of Annex I shall apply without the need for additional testing only
to vehicles of the same type.

Article 8

Conformity of production

3.
The in-service conformity measures shall be appropriate for
confirming the functionality of the pollution control devices dur-
ing the normal useful life of the vehicles under normal conditions
of use as specified in Annex II to this Regulation.

4.
The in-service conformity measures shall be checked for a
period of up to 5 years of age or 100 000 km, whichever is the
sooner.

5.
The manufacturer shall not be obliged to carry out an audit
of in-service conformity if the number of vehicles sold precludes
obtaining sufficient samples to test. Therefore, an audit shall not
be required if the annual sales of that vehicle type are less than
5 000 across the Community.

However, the manufacturer of such small series vehicles shall pro-
vide the approval authority with a report of any emissions related
warranty and repair claims and OBD faults as set out in point 2.3
of Annex II to this Regulation. In addition, the type-approval
authority may require such vehicle types to be tested in accor-
dance with Appendix 1 to Annex II to this Regulation.

6. With regard to vehicles type-approved under this Regula-
tion, where the approval authority is not satisfied with the results
of the tests in accordance with the criteria defined in Appendix 2
to Annex II, the remedial measures referred to in Article 30(1) and
in Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC shall be extended to vehicles
in service belonging to the same vehicle type which are likely to
be affected with the same defects in accordance with section 6 of
Appendix 1 to Annex II.

1. Measures to ensure the conformity of production shall be
taken in accordance with the provisions of Article 12 of Directive
2007/46/EC.

2.
Conformity of production shall be checked on the basis of
the description in the type-approval certificate set out in Appen-
dix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation.

The plan of remedial measures presented by the manufacturer
according to section 6.1 of Appendix 1 of Annex II to this Regu-
lation shall be approved by the approval authority. The manufac-
turer shall be responsible for the execution of the approved
remedial plan.

(1) OJ L 76, 6.4.1970, p. 1.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/7

The approval authority shall notify its decision to all Member
States within 30 days. Member States may require that the same
plan of remedial measures be applied to all vehicles of the same
type registered in their territory.

Article 11

Application for EC type-approval of a type of replacement
pollution control device as a separate technical unit

7.
If an approval authority has established that a vehicle type
does not conform to the applicable requirements of Appendix 1,
it shall notify without delay the Member State which granted the
original type-approval in accordance with the requirements of
Article 30(3) of Directive 2007/46/EC.

Following that notification and subject to the provision of
Article 30(6) of Directive 2007/46/EC, the approval authority
which granted the original type-approval shall inform the manu-
facturer that a vehicle type fails to satisfy the requirements of
these provisions and that certain measures are expected of the
manufacturer. The manufacturer shall submit to that authority,
within two months after this notification, a plan of measures to
overcome the defects, the substance of which should correspond
to the requirements of sections 6.1 to 6,8 of Appendix 1. The
approval authority which granted the original type-approval shall,
within two months, consult the manufacturer in order to secure
agreement on a plan of measures and on the carrying out the
plan. If the approval authority which granted the original type-
approval establishes that no agreement can be reached, the pro-
cedure pursuant to Article 30(3) and (4) of Directive 2007/46/EC
shall be initiated

1.
The manufacturer shall submit to the approval authority an
application for EC type-approval of a type of replacement pollu-
tion control device as a separate technical unit.

The application shall be drawn up in accordance with the model
of the information document set out in Appendix 1 to Annex XIII.

2.
In addition to the requirements laid down in paragraph 1,
the manufacturer shall submit to the technical service responsible
for the type-approval test the following:

(a) a vehicle or vehicles of a type approved in accordance with
this Regulation equipped with a new original equipment pol-
lution control device

(b) one sample of the type of the replacement pollution control

device

Article 10

Pollution control devices

(c) an additional sample of the type of the replacement pollu-
tion control device, in the case of a replacement pollution
control device intended to be fitted to a vehicle equipped
with an OBD system.

1.
The manufacturer shall ensure that replacement pollution
control devices intended to be fitted to EC type-approved vehicles
covered by the scope of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 are EC
type-approved, as separate technical units within the meaning of
Article 10(2) of Directive 2007/46/EC,
in accordance with
Article 12, Article 13 and Annex XIII to this Regulation.

Catalytic converters and particulate filters shall be considered to
be pollution control devices for the purposes of this Regulation.

Original equipment replacement pollution control devices,
2.
which fall within the type covered by point 2.3 of the Addendum
to Appendix 4 to Annex I and are intended for fitment to a vehicle
to which the relevant type-approval document refers, do not need
to comply with Annex XIII provided they fulfil the requirements
of points 2.1 and 2.2 of that Annex.

The manufacturer shall ensure that the original pollution

3.
control device carries identification markings.

The identification markings referred to in paragraph 3 shall

4.
comprise the following:

(a)

the vehicle or engine manufacturer’s name or trade mark;

3.
For the purposes of paragraph 2(a), the test vehicles shall be
selected by the applicant with the agreement of the technical
service.

The test vehicles shall comply with the requirements set out in
Section 3.1 of Annex 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83.

The test vehicles shall respect the following requirements:

(a)

they shall have no emission control system defects;

(b) any excessively worn out or malfunctioning emission-related

original part shall be repaired or replaced;

(c)

they shall be tuned properly and set to manufacturer’s speci-
fication prior to emission testing.

4.
For the purposes of points (b) and (c) of paragraph 2, the
sample shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the applicant’s
trade name or mark and its commercial designation.

(b)

the make and identifying part number of the original pollu-
tion control device as recorded in the information mentioned
in point 3.2.12.2 of Appendix 3 to Annex I.

For the purposes of paragraph 2(c), the sample shall have

5.
been deteriorated as defined under point 25 of Article 2.

L 199/8

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Article 12

Administrative provisions for EC type-approval of
replacement pollution control device as separate
technical unit

1.
If all the relevant requirements are met, the type approval
authority shall grant an EC type-approval for replacement pollu-
tion control devices as separate technical unit and issue a type-
approval number in accordance with the numbering system set
out in Annex VII to Directive 2007/46/EC.

The approval authority shall not assign the same number to
another replacement pollution control device type.

The same type-approval number may cover the use of that
replacement pollution control device type on a number of differ-
ent vehicle types.

2.
For the purposes of paragraph 1, the approval authority
shall issue an EC type-approval certificate established in accor-
dance with the model set out in Appendix 2 to Annex XIII.

If the vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance
5.
information is not available, or does not conform to Article 6
and 7 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 and Annex XIV of this
Regulation, when the application for type-approval is made, the
manufacturer shall provide that information within six months of
the relevant date set out in paragraph 2 of Article 10 of Regula-
tion (EC) No 715/2007 or within six months of the date of type-
approval, whichever date is later.

6.
The obligations to provide information within the dates
specified in paragraph 5 shall apply only if, following type-
approval, the vehicle is placed on the market.

When the vehicle is placed on the market more than six months
after type-approval, the information shall be provided on the date
on which the vehicle is placed on the market.

7.
The approval authority may presume that the manufacturer
has put in place satisfactory arrangements and procedures with
regard to access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and mainte-
nance information, on the basis of a completed Certificate on
Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance
Information, providing that no complaint was made, and that the
manufacturer provides thise information within the period set out
in paragraph 5.

3.
If the applicant for type-approval is able to demonstrate to
the approval authority or technical service that the replacement
pollution control device is of a type indicated in section 2.3 of the
Addendum to Appendix 4 to Annex I, the granting of a type-
approval shall not be dependent on verification of compliance
with the requirements specified in section 4 of Annex XIII.

8.
In addition to the requirements for the access to OBD infor-
mation that are specified in Section 4 of Annex XI, the manufac-
turer shall make available to interested parties the following
information:

Article 13

Access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and
maintenance information

1. Manufacturers shall put in place the neccessary arrange-
ments and procedures, in accordance with Articles 6 and 7 of
Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 and Annex XIV of this regulation,
to ensure that vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance
information is readily accessible.

2.
Approval authorities shall only grant type-approval after
receiving from the manufacturer a Certificate on Access to Vehicle
OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information.

3.
The Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle
Repair and Maintenance Information shall serve as the proof of
compliance with Article 6(7) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.
The Certificate on Access to Vehicle OBD and Vehicle
Repair and Maintenance Information shall be drawn up in accor-
dance with the model set out in Appendix 1 of Annex XIV.

(a)

relevant information to enable the development of replace-
ment components which are critical to the correct function-
ing of the OBD system.

(b)

information to enable the development of generic diagnostic
tools.

For the purposes of point (a), the development of replacement
components shall not be restricted by: the unavailability of perti-
nent information, the technical requirements relating to malfunc-
tion indication strategies if the OBD thresholds are exceeded or if
the OBD system is unable to fulfil the basic OBD monitoring
requirements of this Regulation; specific modifications to the han-
dling of OBD information to deal independently with vehicle
operation on petrol or on gas; and the type-approval of gas-
fuelled vehicles that contain a limited number of minor
deficiencies.

For the purposes of point (b), where manufacturers use diagnos-
tic and test tools in accordance with ISO 22900 Modular Vehicle
Communication Interface (MVCI) and ISO 22901 Open Diagnos-
tic Data Exchange (ODX) in their franchised networks, the ODX
files shall be accessible to independent operators via the web site
of the manufacturer.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/9

The Forum on Access to Vehicle Information (hereafter ‘the’

9.
Forum) is hereby established.

The Forum shall consider whether access to information affects
the advances made in reducing vehicle theft and shall make rec-
ommendations for improving the requirements relating to access
to information. In particular, the Forum shall advise the Commis-
sion on the introduction of an accreditation process for indepen-
dent operators to be authorised to access information on vehicle
security features.

The Commission may decide to keep the discussions and findings
of the Forum confidential.

Article 14

The approval authority shall proceed to an audit in order to
4.
verify compliance by the manufacturer with the obligations con-
cerning access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance
information, if an independent operator or a trade association
representing independent operators files a complaint to the
approval authority.

5. When carrying out the audit, the approval authority may
ask a technical service or any other independent expert to carry
out an assessment to verify whether these obligations are met.

Article 15

Special requirements regarding type approval information

1.
By way of derogation from Annex I to Council Directive
70/156/EEC (1) and until 29 April 2009, the additional require-
ments set out in Annex XVIII to this Regulation shall also apply.

Compliance with the obligations regarding access to
vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance
information

2.
By way of derogation from Annex III to Council Directive
70/156/EEC and until 29 April 2009, the additional requirements
set out in Annex XIX to this Regulation shall also apply.

1.
An approval authority may, at any time, whether on its own
initiative, on the basis of a complaint, or on the basis of an assess-
ment by a technical service, check the compliance of a manufac-
turer with the provisions of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, this
Regulation, and the terms of the Certificate on Access to Vehicle
OBD and Vehicle Repair and Maintenance Information.

2. Where an approval authority finds that the manufacturer
has failed to comply with its obligations regarding access to
vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information, the
approval authority which granted the relevant type approval shall
take appropriate steps to remedy the situation.

3.
These steps may include withdrawal or suspension of type-
approval, fines, or other measures adopted in accordance with
Article 13 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

Article 16

Amendments to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 is amended in accordance with
Annex XVII to this Regulation.

Article 17

Entry into force

This Regulation shall enter into force on the third day following
its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.

However, the obligations set out in Articles 4(5), 4(6), 5(3)(d)
and 5(3)(e) shall apply from 1 September 2011 for the type-
approval of new types of vehicles and from 1 January 2014 for
all new vehicles sold, registered or put into service in the
Community.

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.

Done at Brussels, 18 July 2008.

For the Commission
Günter VERHEUGEN
Vice-President

(1) OJ L 42, 23.2.1970, p. 1 Directive as last amended by Commission

Directive 2007/37/EC

L 199/10

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

LIST OF ANNEXES

ANNEX I

Administrative provisions for EC type-approval

Appendix 1

Verification of conformity of production (1st statistical method)

Appendix 2

Verification of conformity of production (2nd statistical method)

Appendix 3

Model information document

Appendix 4

Model EC type-approval certificate

Appendix 5

OBD related information

Appendix 6

EC type-approval certificate numbering system

Appendix 7

Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with OBD in-use performance requirements

ANNEX II

In-service conformity

Appendix 1

In-service conformity check

Appendix 2

Statistical procedure for in-service conformity testing

Appendix 3

Responsibilities for in-service conformity

ANNEX III

Verifying average exhaust emissions at ambient conditions (Type 1 test)

ANNEX IV

Emissions data required at type-approval for roadworthiness purposes

Appendix 1

Measuring carbon monoxide emissions at idling speeds (Type 2 test)

Appendix 2

Measurement of smoke opacity

ANNEX V

Verifying emissions of crankcase gases (Type 3 test)

ANNEX VI

Determination of evaporative emissions (Type 4 test)

ANNEX VII

Verifying the durability of pollution control devices (Type 5 test)

Appendix 1

Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)

Appendix 2

Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)

Appendix 3

Standard Road Cycle (SRC)

ANNEX VIII

Verifying the average exhaust emissions at low ambient temperatures (Type 6 test)

ANNEX IX

Specifications of reference fuels

ANNEX X

Emissions test procedure for hybrid electric vehicles (HEV)

ANNEX XI

On-board diagnostics (OBD) for motor vehicles

Appendix 1

Functional aspects of OBD systems

Appendix 2

Essential characteristics of the vehicle family

ANNEX XII

Determination of CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

ANNEX XIII

EC Type-approval of replacement pollution control devices as separate technical unit

Appendix 1

Model information document

Appendix 2

Model EC type-approval certificate

Appendix 3

Model EC type-approval mark

ANNEX XIV

Access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information

Appendix 1

Certificate of compliance

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/11

ANNEX XV

Appendix 1

Appendix 2

In-service conformity of vehicles type-approval under Directive 70/220/EC

In-service conformity check

Statistical procedure for in-service conformity testing

ANNEX XVI

Requirements for vehicles that use a reagent for the exhaust aftertreatment system

ANNEX XVII

Amendments to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

ANNEX XVIII

Special Provisions Regarding Annex I to Council Directive 70/156/EEC

ANNEX XIX

Special Provisions Regarding Annex III to Council Directive 70/156/EEC

L 199/12

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

ANNEX I

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS FOR EC TYPE-APPROVAL

1.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR GRANTING OF EC TYPE-APPROVAL

1.1.

Additional requirements for mono fuel gas vehicles and bi fuel gas vehicles

1.1.1.

For the purposes of section 1.1 the following definitions shall apply:

1.1.1.1. A family means a group of vehicle types fuelled by LPG, NG/biomethane identified by a parent vehicle.

1.1.1.2. A parent vehicle means a vehicle that is selected to act as the vehicle on which the self adaptability of a fuelling
system is going to be demonstrated, and to which the members of a family refer. It is possible to have more than
one parent vehicle in a family.

1.1.1.3. A member of the family means a vehicle that shares the following essential characteristics with its parent:

(a)

It is produced by the same vehicle manufacturer;

(b)

It is subject to the same emission limits;

(c)

If the gas fuelling system has a central metering for the whole engine, it has a certified power output between
0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle;

(d)

If the gas fuelling system has an individual metering per cylinder, it has a certified power output per cylinder
between 0,7 and 1,15 times that of the engine of the parent vehicle;

(e)

If fitted with a catalyst system, it has the same type of catalyst i.e. three-way, oxidation, de NOx;

(f)

It has a gas fuelling system (including the pressure regulator) from the same system manufacturer and of the
same type: induction, vapour injection (single point, multipoint), liquid injection (single point, multipoint);

(g) This gas fuelling system is controlled by an ECU of the same type and technical specification, containing the
same software principles and control strategy. The vehicle may have a second ECU compared to the parent
vehicle, provided that the ECU is only used to control the injectors, additional shut-off valves and the data
acquisition from additional sensors.

With regard to the requirements referred to in point (c) and (d), in the case where a demonstration shows two gas
fuelled vehicles could be members of the same family with the exception of their certified power output, respec-
tively P1 and P2 (P1 < P2), and both are tested as if they were parent vehicles, the family relation will be considered
valid for any vehicle with a certified power output between 0,7 × P1 and 1,15 × P2.

1.1.2.

In case of vehicles fuelled by LPG, NG/biomethane EC type-approval
requirements:

is granted subject to the following

1.1.2.1. For the type-approval of a parent vehicle, the parent vehicle shall demonstrate its capability to adapt to any fuel
composition that may occur across the market. In the case of LPG there are variations in C3/C4 composition. In
the case of natural gas there are generally two types of fuel, high calorific fuel (H-gas) and low calorific fuel (L-gas),
but with a significant spread within both ranges; they differ significantly in Wobbe index. These variations are
reflected in the reference fuels.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/13

1.1.2.2. The parent vehicle shall be tested in the type 1 test on the two extreme gas reference fuels set out in Annex IX. In
the case of NG/biomethane, if the transition from one gas fuel to the other gas fuel is in practice aided through the
use of a switch, this switch shall not be used during type-approval.

1.1.2.3. The vehicle is considered to conform if, with both reference fuels, the vehicle complies with the emission limits.

1.1.2.4. The ratio of emission results ‘r’ shall be determined for each pollutant as follows:

Type of fuel

Reference fuels

Calculation of ‘r’

LPG

NG/Biomethane

fuel A

fuel B

fuel G20

fuel G25

r =

B

A

r =

G25

G20

1.1.3.

For the type-approval of a mono fuel gas vehicle and bi fuel gas vehicles operating in gas mode as a member of the
family, a type 1 test shall be performed with one gas reference fuel. This reference fuel may be either of the gas
reference fuels. The vehicle is considered to comply if the following requirements are met:

(a)

the vehicle complies with the definition of a family member as defined in section 1.1.1.3;

(b)

if the test fuel is the reference fuel A for LPG or G20 for NG/Biomethane, the emission result for each pol-
lutant shall be multiplied by the relevant factor ‘r’ calculated in section 1.1.2.4 if r > 1; if r < 1, no correction
is needed;

(c)

if the test fuel is the reference fuel B for LPG or G25 for NG/Biomethane, the emission result for each pol-
lutant shall be divided by the relevant factor ‘r’ calculated in section 1.1.2.4 if r < 1; if r > 1, no correction is
needed;

(d) on the manufacturer’s request the type 1 test may be performed on both reference fuels, so that no correction

is needed;

(e)

the vehicle shall comply with the emission limits valid for the relevant category for both measured and cal-
culated emissions;

(f)

if repeated tests are made on the same engine the results on reference fuel G20, or A, and those on reference
fuel G25, or B, shall first be averaged; the ‘r’ factor shall then be calculated from these averaged results;

(g)

during the type 1 test the vehicle shall only use petrol for a maximum of 60 seconds when operating in gas
mode.

1.2.

Additional requirements for flex fuel vehicles

1.2.1.

For the type-approval of a flex fuel ethanol or biodiesel vehicle, the vehicle manufacturer shall describe the capa-
bility of the vehicle to adapt to any mixture of petrol and ethanol fuel (up to an 85 % ethanol blend) or diesel and
biodiesel that may occur across the market.

1.2.2.

For flex fuel vehicles, the transition from one reference fuel to another between the tests shall take place without
manual adjustment of the engine settings.

L 199/14

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

2.

ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS

2.1.

Small volume manufacturers

2.1.1.

List of legislative acts referred to in Article 3(3):

Legislative Act

Requirements

The California Code of Regulations, Title 13, Sec-
tions 1961(a) and 1961(b)(1)(C)(1) applicable to 2001
and later model year vehicles, 1968.1, 1968.2, 1968.5,
1976 and 1975, published by Barclay’s Publishing

Type-approval must be granted under the California
Code of Regulations applicable to the most recent model
year of light-duty vehicle.

2.2.

Inlets to fuel tanks

2.2.1.

The inlet orifice of the petrol or ethanol tank shall be designed so that it prevents the tank from being filled from
a fuel pump delivery nozzle that has an external diameter of 23,6 mm or greater.

2.2.2.

Section 2.2.1 shall not apply to a vehicle for which both of the following conditions are satisfied:

(a)

the vehicle is designed and constructed so that no device designed to control the emission of gaseous pollut-
ants is adversely affected by leaded petrol, and

(b)

the vehicle is conspicuously, legibly and indelibly marked with the symbol for unleaded petrol specified in
ISO 2575:2004 in a position immediately visible to a person filling the fuel tank. Additional markings are
permitted.

2.2.3.

Provision shall be made to prevent excess evaporative emissions and fuel spillage caused by a missing fuel filler
cap. This may be achieved by using one of the following:

(a)

an automatically opening and closing, non-removable fuel filler cap,

(b) design features which avoid excess evaporative emissions in the case of a missing fuel filler cap,

(c)

any other provision which has the same effect. Examples may include, but are not limited to, a tethered filler
cap, a chained filler cap or one utilizing the same locking key for the filler cap as for the vehicle’s ignition. In
this case the key shall be removable from the filler cap only in the locked condition.

2.3.

Provisions for electronic system security

2.3.1.

Any vehicle with an emission control computer shall include features to prevent modification, except as autho-
rised by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall authorise modifications if these modifications are necessary for
the diagnosis, servicing, inspection, retrofitting or repair of the vehicle. Any reprogrammable computer codes or
operating parameters shall be resistant to tampering and use the provisions in ISO 15031-7; dated 15 March 2001
(SAE J2186 dated October 1996) provided that the security exchange is conducted using the protocols and diag-
nostic connector as prescribed in Appendix 1 to Annex XI. Any removable calibration memory chips shall be pot-
ted, encased in a sealed container or protected by electronic algorithms and shall not be changeable without the
use of specialised tools and procedures. Only features directly associated with emissions calibration or prevention
of vehicle theft may be so protected.

2.3.2.

Computer-coded engine operating parameters shall not be changeable without the use of specialized tools and pro-
cedures (e. g. soldered or potted computer components or sealed (or soldered) computer enclosures).

2.3.3.

In the case of mechanical fuel-injection pumps fitted to compression-ignition engines, manufacturers shall take
adequate steps to protect the maximum fuel delivery setting from tampering while a vehicle is in service.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/15

2.3.4. Manufacturers may apply to the approval authority for an exemption to one of the requirements of Section 2.3 for
those vehicles which are unlikely to require protection. The criteria that the approval authority shall evaluate in
considering an exemption shall include the current availability of performance chips, the high-performance capa-
bility of the vehicle and the projected sales volume of the vehicle.

2.3.5. Manufacturers using programmable computer code systems (e.g. electrical erasable programmable read-only
memory, EEPROM) shall deter unauthorised reprogramming. Manufacturers shall include enhanced tamper-
protection strategies and write-protect features requiring electronic access to an off-site computer maintained by
the manufacturer ’, to which independent operators shall also have access using the protection afforded in Sec-
tion 2.3.1. and Section 2.2. of Annex XIV. Methods giving an adequate level of tamper protection shall be approved
by the approval authority.

2.4.

Application of tests

2.4.1.

Figure I.2.4 illustrates the application of the tests for type-approval of a vehicle. The specific test procedures are
described in Annexes II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, X, XI, XII and XVI (1).

(1) Specific test procedures for hydrogen and flex fuel biodiesel vehicles will be defined at a later stage

Application of test requirements for type-approval and extensions

Figure I.2.4

Vehicle category

Vehicles with positive ignition engines including hybrids

Mono fuel

Bi fuel (1)

Reference fuel

Petrol (E5)

LPG

NG/Biomethane

Hydrogen

Petrol (E5)

Petrol (E5)

Petrol (E5)

Flex fuel (1)

Petrol (E5)

Vehicles with compression ignition
engines including hybrids

Flex fuel

Mono fuel

Diesel (B5)

Diesel (B5)

LPG

NG/Biomethane

Hydrogen

Ethanol (E85)

Biodiesel

Gaseous pollutants
(Type 1 test)

Particulates
(Type 1 test)

Yes

Yes
(direct injec-
tion)

Idle emissions
(Type 2 test)

Crankcase emissions
(Type 3 test)

Evaporative emissions
(Type 4 test)

Durability
(Type 5 test)

Low temperature emissions
(Type 6 test)

In-service conformity

On-board diagnostics

CO2 emissions and fuel
consumption

Smoke opacity

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

—

Yes

—

Yes

Yes

—

Yes

—

Yes

Yes

Yes

—

Yes

—

Yes

Yes

—

Yes

—

Yes

Yes

Yes

—

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes
(direct injec-
tion) (petrol)

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes
(direct injec-
tion)
(petrol)

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes

Yes

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes
(both fuels)

—

—

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes
(direct injection)
(both fuels)

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes
(petrol)

Yes (2)
(both fuels)

Yes
(both fuels)

Yes

Yes
(both fuels)

—

Yes

Yes

—

—

—

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(1) When a bi fuel vehicle is combined with a flex fuel vehicle, both test requirements are applicable.
(2) Test on petrol only for vehicles type-approved before the dates set out in Article 10(6) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007. The test will be performed with both fuels on or after these dates.

L

1
9
9
/
1
6

E
N

O

f
f
i
c
i
a
l

J
o
u
r
n
a
l

o
f

t
h
e

E
u
r
o
p
e
a
n
U
n
o
n

i

.

.

2
8
7
2
0
0
8

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/17

3.

EXTENSIONS TO TYPE-APPROVALS

3.1.

Extensions for tailpipe emissions (type 1, type 2 and type 6 tests)

3.1.1.

Vehicles with different reference masses

3.1.1.1. The type-approval shall be extended only to vehicles with a reference mass requiring the use of the next two higher

equivalent inertia or any lower equivalent inertia.

3.1.1.2. For category N vehicles, the approval shall be extended only to vehicles with a lower reference mass, if the emis-
sions of the vehicle already approved are within the limits prescribed for the vehicle for which extension of the
approval is requested.

3.1.2.

Vehicles with different overall transmission ratios

3.1.2.1. The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles with different transmission ratios only under certain conditions.

3.1.2.2. To determine whether type-approval can be extended, for each of the transmission ratios used in the type 1 and

type 6 tests, the proportion,

E = (V2 – V1) / V1

shall be determined where, at an engine speed of 1 000 rpm, V1 is the speed of the vehicle-type approved and V2
is the speed of the vehicle type for which extension of the approval is requested.

3.1.2.3.

If, for each transmission ratio, E ≤ 8 %, the extension shall be granted without repeating the type 1 and type 6 tests.

3.1.2.4.

If, for at least one transmission ratio, E > 8 %, and if, for each gear ratio, E ≤ 13 %, the type 1 and type 6 tests shall
be repeated. The tests may be performed in a laboratory chosen by the manufacturer subject to the approval of the
technical service. The report of the tests shall be sent to the technical service responsible for the type-approval tests.

3.1.3.

Vehicles with different reference masses and transmission ratios

The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles with different reference masses and transmission ratios, provided
that all the conditions prescribed in 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 are fulfilled.

3.1.4.

Vehicles with periodically regenerating systems

The type-approval of a vehicle type equipped with a periodically regenerating system shall be extended to other
vehicles with periodically regenerating systems, whose parameters described below are identical, or within the
stated tolerances. The extension shall only relate to measurements specific to the defined periodically regenerating
system.

3.1.4.1.

Identical parameters for extending approval are:

(1) Engine,

(2) Combustion process,

(3) Periodically regenerating system (i.e. catalyst, particulate trap),

(4) Construction (i.e. type of enclosure, type of precious metal, type of substrate, cell density),

(5) Type and working principle,

(6) Dosage and additive system,

(7) Volume ± 10 per cent,

(8) Location (temperature ± 50 °C at 120 km/h or 5 per cent difference of max. temperature/pressure).

L 199/18

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.1.4.2. Use of Ki factors for vehicles with different reference masses

The Ki factors developed by the procedures in section 3 of Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 for type-
approval of a vehicle type with a periodically regenerating system, may be used by other vehicles which meet the
criteria referred to in section 3.1.4.1 and have a reference mass within the next two higher equivalent inertia classes
or any lower equivalent inertia.

3.1.5.

Application of extensions to other vehicles

When an extension has been granted in accordance with 3.1.1 to 3.1.4, such a type-approval shall not be further
extended to other vehicles.

3.2.

Extensions for evaporative emissions (type 4 test)

3.2.1.

The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles equipped with a control system for evaporative emissions which
meet the following conditions:

3.2.1.1. The basic principle of fuel/air metering (e.g. single point injection) is the same.

3.2.1.2. The shape of the fuel tank and the material of the fuel tank and liquid fuel hoses is identical.

3.2.1.3. The worst-case vehicle with regard to the cross-section and approximate hose length shall be tested. Whether non-
identical vapour/liquid separators are acceptable is decided by the technical service responsible for the type-
approval tests.

3.2.1.4. The fuel tank volume is within a range of ± 10 %.

3.2.1.5. The setting of the fuel tank relief valve is identical.

3.2.1.6. The method of storage of the fuel vapour is identical, i.e. trap form and volume, storage medium, air cleaner (if

used for evaporative emission control), etc.

3.2.1.7. The method of purging of the stored vapour is identical (e.g. air flow, start point or purge volume over the pre-

conditioning cycle).

3.2.1.8. The method of sealing and venting of the fuel metering system is identical.

3.2.2.

The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles with:

3.2.2.1. different engine sizes;

3.2.2.2. different engine powers;

3.2.2.3. automatic and manual gearboxes;

3.2.2.4.

two and four wheel transmissions;

3.2.2.5. different body styles; and

3.2.2.6. different wheel and tyre sizes.

3.3.

Extensions for durability of pollution control devices (type 5 test)

3.3.1.

The type-approval shall be extended to different vehicle types, provided that the vehicle, engine or pollution con-
trol system parameters specified below are identical or remain within the prescribed tolerances:

3.3.1.1. Vehicle:

Inertia category: the two inertia categories immediately above and any inertia category below.

Total road load at 80 km/h: + 5 % above and any value below.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/19

3.3.1.2. Engine

(a)

engine cylinder capacity (± 15 %),

(b) number and control of valves,

(c)

fuel system,

(d)

type of cooling system,

(e)

combustion process.

3.3.1.3. Pollution control system parameters:

(a) Catalytic converters and particulate filters:

number of catalytic converters, filters and elements,

size of catalytic converters and filters (volume of monolith ± 10 %),

type of catalytic activity (oxidizing, three-way, lean NOx trap, SCR, lean NOx catalyst or other),

precious metal load (identical or higher),

precious metal type and ratio (± 15 %),

substrate (structure and material),

cell density,

temperature variation of no more than 50 K at the inlet of the catalytic converter or filter. This temperature
variation shall be checked under stabilized conditions at a speed of 120 km/h and the load setting of the type
1 test.

(b) Air injection:

with or without

type (pulsair, air pumps, other(s))

(c)

EGR:

with or without

type (cooled or non cooled, active or passive control, high pressure or low pressure).

3.3.1.4. The durability test may be carried out using a vehicle, which has a different body style, gear box (automatic
or manual) and size of the wheels or tyres, from those of the vehicle type for which the type-approval is sought.

3.4.

Extensions for on-board diagnostics

3.4.1.

The type-approval shall be extended to different vehicles with identical engine and emission control systems as
defined in Annex XI, Appendix 2. The type-approval shall be extended regardless of the following vehicle
characteristics:

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

engine accessories;

tyres;

equivalent inertia;

cooling system;

overall gear ratio;

transmission type; and

type of bodywork.

L 199/20

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.5.

Extensions for CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

3.5.1.

Vehicles powered by an internal combustion engine only, except vehicles equipped with a periodically regenerat-
ing emission control system.

3.5.1.1. The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles differing with regard to the following characteristics, if the CO2
emissions measured by the technical service do not exceed the type-approval value by more than 4 % for vehicles
of category M and 6 % for vehicles of category N:

— reference mass,

— technically permissible maximum laden mass,

— type of bodywork as defined in Section C of Annex II of Directive 2007/46/EC,

— overall gear ratios,

— engine equipment and accessories.,

3.5.2.

Vehicles powered by an internal combustion engine only and equipped with a periodically regenerating emission
control system

3.5.2.1. The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles, differing with regard to the characteristics given in Section 3.5.1.1
above, but not exceeding the family characteristics of UN/ECE Regulation No 101 (1), Annex 10, if the CO2 emis-
sions measured by the technical service do not exceed the type approved value by more than 4 % for vehicles of
category M and 6 % for vehicles of category N, and where the same Ki factor is applicable.

3.5.2.2. The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles with a different Ki factor, if the CO2 emissions measured by the
technical service do not exceed the type approved value by more than 4 % for vehicles of category M and 6 % for
vehicles of category N.

3.5.3.

Vehicles powered by an electric power train only

Extensions shall be granted after agreement with the technical service responsible for conducting the tests.

3.5.4.

Vehicles powered by a hybrid electric power train

The type-approval shall be extended to vehicles differing with regard to the following characteristics, if the CO2
emissions and the electric energy consumption measured by the technical service do not exceed the type approved
value by more than 4 % for vehicles of category M and 6 % for vehicles of category N:

— reference mass,

— technically permissible maximum laden mass,

— Type of bodywork as defined in Section C of Annex II of Directive 2007/46/EC,

— With respect to a change in any other characteristic extensions may be granted after agreement with the tech-

nical service responsible for conducting the tests.,

3.5.5.

Extension of type-approval of vehicles of category N within a family:

3.5.5.1. For vehicles of category N that are approved as members of a vehicle family using the procedure in Section 3.6.2,
the type-approval shall be extended to vehicles from within the same family only if the technical service estimates
that the fuel consumption of the new vehicle does not exceed the fuel consumption of the vehicle on which the
family’s fuel consumption is based.

Type-approvals may also be extended to vehicles which:

— are up to 110 kg heavier than the family member tested, provided that they are within 220 kg of the lightest

member of the family,

— have a lower overall transmission ratio than the family member tested due solely to a change in tyre sizes,

and,

— conform with the family in all other respects.,

(1) OJ L 158, 19.6.2007, p. 34

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/21

3.5.5.2. For vehicles of category N that are type-approved as members of a vehicle family using the procedure in point 3.6.3,
the type-approval can be extended to vehicles from within the same family without additional testing only if the
technical service estimates that the fuel consumption of the new vehicle falls within the limits made up of those
two vehicles in the family that have the lowest and the highest fuel consumption, respectively.

3.6.

Type-approval of vehicles of category N within a family for fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

Vehicles of category N shall be type-approved within a family as defined in point 3.6.1 using one of the two alter-
native methods described in points 3.6.2 and 3.6.3.

3.6.1.

N vehicles may be grouped together into a family for the purposes of measurement of fuel consumption and CO2
emissions if the following parameters are identical or within the specified limits:

3.6.1.1.

Identical parameters shall be the following:

— manufacturer and type as defined in section I of Appendix 4,

— engine capacity,

— emission control system type,

— fuel system type as defined in point 1.10.2 of Appendix 4.,

3.6.1.2. The following parameters shall be within the following limits:

— transmission overall ratios (no more than 8 % higher than the lowest) as defined in point 1.13.3 of

Appendix 4,

— reference mass (no more than 220 kg lighter than the heaviest),

— frontal area (no more than 15 % smaller than the largest),

— engine power (no more than 10 % less than the highest value).

3.6.2.

3.6.3.

A vehicle family, as defined in point 3.6.1, may be approved with CO2 emission and fuel consumption data that
are common to all members of the family. The technical service shall select for testing the member of the family
which the service considers to have the highest CO2 emission. The measurements shall be performed as described
in Annex XII, and the results according to the method described in section 5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation No 101 shall
be used as type-approval values that are common to all members of the family.

Vehicles that are grouped in a family as defined in point 3.6.1 may be approved with individual CO2 emission and
fuel consumption data for each of the family members. The technical service shall select for testing the two vehicles,
which the service considers to have the highest and the lowest CO2 emissions respectively. The measurements shall
be performed as described in Annex XII. If the manufacturer’s data for these two vehicles falls within the tolerance
limits described in section 5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation No 101, the CO2 emissions declared by the manufacturer for
all members of the vehicle family can be used as type-approval values. If the manufacturer’s data do not fall within
the tolerance limits, the results according to the method described in section 5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation No 101
shall be used as type-approval values and the technical service shall select an appropriate number of other family
members for additional tests.

4.

CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

4.1.

Introduction

4.1.1. Where applicable the tests of types 1, 2, 3, 4, the test for OBD, the test for CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
and the test for smoke opacity shall be performed, as described in section 2.4. The specific procedures for con-
formity of production are set out in the sections 4.2 to 4.10.

4.2.

Checking the conformity of the vehicle for a type 1 test

4.2.1.

The type 1 test shall be carried out on a vehicle of the same specification as described in the type-approval cer-
tificate. When a type 1 test is to be carried out for a vehicle type-approval that has one or several extensions, the
type 1 tests shall be carried out either on the vehicle described in the initial information package or on the vehicle
described in the information package relating to the relevant extension.

L 199/22

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

4.2.2.

After selection by the approval authority, the manufacturer shall not undertake any adjustment to the vehicles
selected.

4.2.2.1. Three vehicles shall be selected at random in the series and tested as described in Annex III to this Regulation. The
deterioration factors shall be used in the same way. The limit values are set out in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I to
Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.2.2.2.

If the approval authority is satisfied with the production standard deviation given by the manufacturer in accor-
dance with Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC, the tests shall be carried out according to Appendix 1 of this Annex.

If the approval authority is not satisfied with the production standard deviation given by the manufacturer in accor-
dance with Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC, the tests shall be carried out according to Appendix 2 of this Annex.

4.2.2.3. The production of a series shall be deemed to conform or not to conform on the basis of a sampling test of the
vehicles once a pass decision is reached for all the pollutants or a fail decision is reached for one pollutant, accord-
ing to the test criteria applied in the appropriate appendix.

When a pass decision has been reached for one pollutant, that decision shall not be changed by any additional tests
carried out to reach a decision for the other pollutants.

If no pass decision is reached for all the pollutants and no fail decision is reached for one pollutant, a test shall be
carried out on another vehicle (see Figure I.4.2).

Figure I.4.2

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/23

4.2.3.

Notwithstanding the requirements of Annex III, the tests shall be carried out on vehicles coming straight off the
production line.

4.2.3.1. However, at the request of the manufacturer, the tests may be carried out on vehicles which have completed:

(a) A maximum of 3 000 km for vehicles equipped with a positive ignition engine;

(b) A maximum of 15 000 km for vehicles equipped with a compression ignition engine.

The running-in procedure shall be conducted by the manufacturer, who shall undertake not to make any adjust-
ments to these vehicles.

4.2.3.2.

If the manufacturer wishes to run in the vehicles, (‘x’ km, where x ≤ 3 000 km for vehicles equipped with a posi-
tive ignition engine and x ≤ 15 000 km for vehicles equipped with a compression ignition engine), the procedure
shall be the following:

(a)

the pollutant emissions (type 1) shall be measured at zero and at ‘x’ km on the first tested vehicle;

(b)

the evolution coefficient of the emissions between zero and ‘x’ km shall be calculated for each of the pollutant:

Emissions ‘x’ km/Emissions zero km

This may be less than 1; and

(c)

the other vehicles shall not be run in, but their zero km emissions shall be multiplied by the evolution coef-
ficient. In this case, the values to be taken shall be:

(i)

the values at ‘x’ km for the first vehicle;

(ii)

the values at zero km multiplied by the evolution coefficient for the other vehicles.

4.2.3.3. All these tests shall be conducted with commercial fuel. However, at the manufacturer’s request, the reference fuels

described in Annex IX may be used.

4.3.

Checking the conformity of the vehicle for CO2 emissions

4.3.1.

If a vehicle type has had one or several extensions, the tests shall be carried out on the vehicle(s) described in the
information package which accompanied the first type-approval application, or on the vehicle described in the
information package that accompanied the relevant extension.

4.3.2.

If the approval authority is not satisfied with the auditing procedure of the manufacturer, points 3.3 and 3,4 of
Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC shall apply.

4.3.3.

For the purpose of this section and Appendices 1 and 2, the term ‘pollutant’ shall include the regulated pollutants
(given in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007) and the emission of CO2.

4.3.4.

The conformity of the vehicle for CO2 emissions shall be determined in accordance with the procedure described
in point 4.2.2. with the following exceptions:

4.3.4.1. The provisions of Section 4.2.2.1 shall be replaced by the following:

Three vehicles shall be randomly taken in the series and tested as described in Annex XII.

4.3.4.2. The provisions of Section 4.2.3.1 shall be replaced by the following:

However, at the request of the manufacturer, the tests may be carried out on vehicles which have completed a maxi-
mum of 15 000 km.

In this case, the running-in procedure shall be conducted by the manufacturer, who shall undertake not to make
any adjustments to these vehicles.

L 199/24

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

4.3.4.3. The provisions of Section 4.2.3.2 shall be replaced by the following:

If the manufacturer wishes to run in the vehicles, (‘x’ km, where x ≤ 15 000 km), the procedure shall be the
following:

(a)

the pollutant emissions shall be measured at zero and at ‘x’ km on the first tested vehicle;

(b)

the evolution coefficient of the emissions between zero and ‘x’ km shall be calculated for each of the pollutant:

Emissions ‘x’ km/Emissions zero km

This may be less than 1; and

(c)

the other vehicles shall not be run in, but their zero km emissions shall be multiplied by the evolution coef-
ficient. In this case, the values to be taken shall be:

(i)

the values at ‘x’ km for the first vehicle;

(ii)

the values at zero km multiplied by the evolution coefficient for the other vehicles.

4.3.4.4. The provisions of Section 4.2.3.3 shall be replaced by the following:

The reference fuels described in Annex IX of this Regulation, shall be used for testing.

4.3.4.5. When checking the conformity of vehicle for CO2 emissions, as an alternative to the procedure mentioned in Sec-
tion 4.3.4.3, the vehicle manufacturer may use a fixed evolution coefficient EC of 0,92 and multiply all values of
CO2 measured at zero km by this factor.

4.4.

Vehicles powered by an electric power train only

Measures to ensure the conformity of production with regard to electric energy consumption shall be checked on
the basis of the description in the type-approval certificate set out in Appendix 4 to this Annex.

4.4.1.

The holder of the approval shall, in particular:

4.4.1.1. Ensure the existence of procedures for the effective control of production quality;

4.4.1.2. Have access to the equipment necessary for checking conformity with each approved type;

4.4.1.3. Ensure that the data concerning the test result are recorded and that the annexed documents are available during

a period to be agreed with the administrative service;

4.4.1.4. Analyse the results of each type of test so as to monitor and ensure the consistency of the characteristics of the

product, taking into account the variations admissible in industrial manufacture;

4.4.1.5. Make sure that for each type of vehicle tests referred to in Annex XII to this Regulation are carried out; notwith-
standing the requirements of paragraph 2.3.1.6 of Annex 7 of UN/ECE Regulation No 101, at the request of the
manufacturer, the tests shall be carried out on vehicles which have not travelled any distance;

4.4.1.6. Make sure that any collections of samples or test pieces demonstrating non-conformity with the type test under
consideration is followed by a subsequent sampling and a further test. All necessary steps shall be taken to
re-establish the conformity of production.

4.4.2.

The approval authorities may verify at any time the methods applied in each production unit.

4.4.2.1.

In every inspection, the records of tests and production monitoring shall be communicated to the visiting inspector.

4.4.2.2. The inspector may select at random the samples to be tested in the manufacturer’s laboratory. The minimum num-

ber of samples shall be determined on the basis of the results of the manufacturer’s own checks.

4.4.2.3. When the quality standard does not seem satisfactory or when it seems necessary to verify the validity of the tests
conducted under Section 4.4.2.2, the inspector shall collect samples to be sent to the technical service which car-
ried out the approval tests.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/25

4.4.2.4. The approval authorities may carry out all the tests set out in this Regulation.

4.5.

Vehicles powered by a hybrid electric power train

4.5.1. Measures to ensure the conformity of production with regard to CO2 emissions and electric energy consumption
from hybrid electric vehicles shall be checked on the basis of the description in the type-approval certificate con-
forming to the model in Appendix 4.

4.5.2.

The control of production conformity shall be based on an assessment made by the approval authority of the
manufacturer’s auditing procedure in order to ensure conformity of the vehicle type with respect to the emission
of CO2 and the electric energy consumption.

4.5.3.

If the approval authority is not satisfied with the standard of the manufacturer’s auditing procedure, it shall require
that verification tests be carried out on vehicles in production.

4.5.4.

Conformity for CO2 emissions shall be checked using the statistical procedures described in Section 4.3 and Appen-
dices 1 and 2. Vehicles shall be tested according to the procedure referred to in Annex XII.

4.6.

Checking the conformity of the vehicle for a type 3 test

4.6.1.

If a type 3 test is to be carried out, it shall be conducted on all vehicles selected for the type 1 conformity of pro-
duction test set out in section 4.2. The conditions laid down in Annex V shall apply.

4.7.

Checking the conformity of the vehicle for a type 4 test

4.7.1.

If a type 4 test is to be carried out, it shall be conducted in accordance with Annex VI.

4.8.

Checking the conformity of the vehicle for On-board Diagnostics (OBD)

4.8.1.

If a verification of the performance of the OBD system is to be carried out, it shall be conducted in accordance
with the following requirements:

4.8.1.1. When the approval authority determines that the quality of production seems unsatisfactory, a vehicle shall be ran-

domly taken from the series and subjected to the tests described in Appendix 1 to Annex XI.

4.8.1.2. The production shall be deemed to conform if this vehicle meets the requirements of the tests described in Appen-

dix 1 to Annex XI.

4.8.1.3.

If the vehicle taken from the series does not satisfy the requirements of section 4.8.1.1, a further random sample
of four vehicles shall be taken from the series and subjected to the tests described in Appendix 1 to Annex XI. The
tests may be carried out on vehicles which have been run in for no more than 15 000 km.

4.8.1.4. The production shall be deemed to conform if at least 3 vehicles meet the requirements of the tests described in

Annex XI, Appendix 1.

4.9.

Checking the conformity of a vehicle fuelled by LPG or natural gas

4.9.1.

Tests for conformity of production may be performed with a commercial fuel of which the C3/C4 ratio lies
between those of the reference fuels in the case of LPG, or of which the Wobbe index lies between those of the
extreme reference fuels in the case of NG. In that case a fuel analysis shall be presented to the approval authority.

L 199/26

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

4.10.

Checking the conformity of vehicle for smoke opacity

4.10.1. Conformity of the vehicle with the approved type as regards the emission of pollutants from compression ignition
engines shall be verified on the basis of the results listed in the Addendum to the type-approval certificate set out
in point 2.4 of Appendix 4.

4.10.2.

In addition to point 10.1, where a check is carried out on a vehicle taken from the series, the tests shall be carried
out as follows:

4.10.2.1 A vehicle which has not been run in shall be subjected to the test under free acceleration described in
section 4.3 of Appendix 2 to Annex IV. The vehicle shall be deemed to conform to the approved type if the absorp-
tion coefficient determined does not exceed by more than 0∙5 m–1 the figure shown in the approval mark.

4.10.2.2 If the figure determined in the test referred to in point 4.10.2.1. exceeds by more than 0∙5 m–1 the figure
shown in the approval mark, a vehicle of the type considered or its engine shall be subjected to the test at steady
speeds over the full-load curve, as described in section 4.2 of Appendix 2 to Annex IV. The emission levels shall
not exceed the limits prescribed in Annex 7 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 (1).

(1) OJ L 326, 24.11.2006, p. 1.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/27

Appendix 1

Verification of conformity of production — First statistical method

1.

The first statistical method shall be used to verify the production conformity for the type 1 test when the manufac-
turer’s production standard deviation is satisfactory. The applicable statistical method is set out in Appendix 1 to
UN/ECE Regulation No 83. The exceptions to these procedures are the following:

1.1.

In paragraph 3, the reference to paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to the applicable table of Annex I
to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

1.2.

In paragraph 3, the reference to Figure 2 shall be understood as reference to Figure I.4.2 of Regulation (EC)
No 692/2008.

Appendix 2

Verification of conformity of production — Second statistical method

1.

The second statistical method shall be used to verify the production conformity requirements for the type 1 test when
the manufacturer’s evidence of production standard deviation is either unsatisfactory or unavailable. The applicable
statistical method is set out in Appendix 2 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, The exceptions to these procedures are the
following:

1.1.

In paragraph 3, the reference to paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to the applicable table of Annex I
to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

L 199/28

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 3

MODEL

INFORMATION DOCUMENT No …

relating to EC type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and access to vehicle repair and
maintenance information

The following information, if applicable, must be supplied in triplicate and include a list of contents. Any drawings must be
supplied in appropriate scale and in sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format. Photographs, if any, must show
sufficient detail.

If the systems, components or separate technical units have electronic controls, information concerning their performance
must be supplied.

0.

0.1.

0.2.

GENERAL

Make (trade name of manufacturer):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.2.1.

Commercial name(s), if available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.3.

Means of identification of type, if marked on the vehicle (1) (a)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.3.1.

Location of that marking:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.4.

0.5.

0.8.

0.9.

1.

1.1.

Category of vehicle (b): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name and address of manufacturer:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name(s) and address(es) of assembly plant(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name and address of the manufacturer’s representative (if any) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VEHICLE

Photographs and/or drawings of a representative vehicle:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.3.

Powered axles (number, position, interconnection):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.

MASSES AND DIMENSIONS (c) (in kg and mm)

(Refer to drawing where applicable)

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).
(a)

If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types
covered by this information document, such characters shall be represented in the documentation by the symbol.?. (e.g. ABC??123??).

(b) Classified according to the definitions listed in Annex II, Section A.
(c)

(e) Where there is one version with a normal cab and another with a sleeper cab, both sets of masses and dimensions are to be stated.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/29

2.6.

2.8.

3.

3.1.

3.1.1.

3.2.

Mass of the vehicle with bodywork and, in the case of the towing vehicle of a category other than M1,
with coupling device, if fitted by the manufacturer, in running order, or mass of the chassis or chassis
with cab, without bodywork and/or coupling device if the manufacturer does not fit the bodywork
and/or coupling device (including liquids, tools, spare wheel, if fitted, and driver and, for buses and
coaches, a crew member if there is a crew seat in the vehicle) (a) (maximum and minimum for each vari-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ant):

Technically permissible maximum laden mass stated by the manufacturer (b) (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POWER PLANT (c) (In the case of a vehicle that can run either on petrol, diesel, etc., or also in combi-
nation with another fuel, items shall be repeated (**))

Manufacturer:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manufacturer’s engine code as marked on the engine: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal combustion engine

3.2.1.1.

Working principle: positive ignition/compression ignition (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1.2.

Number and arrangement of cylinders: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1.2.1.

Bore (d):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm

3.2.1.2.2.

Stroke (d):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm

3.2.1.2.3.

Firing order: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1.3.

Engine capacity (s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3

3.2.1.4.

Volumetric compression ratio (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1.5.

Drawings of combustion chamber, piston crown and, in the case of positive ignition engine, piston rings:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1.6.

Normal engine idling speed (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1

3.2.1.6.1.

High engine idling speed (2)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1

3.2.1.7.

Carbon monoxide content by volume in the exhaust gas with the engine idling (2) . as stated by the manu-
facturer (positive ignition engines only)

3.2.1.8.

Maximum net power (e)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1 (manufacturer’s declared value)

3.2.1.9.

Maximum permitted engine speed as prescribed by the manufacturer:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1

(a) The mass of the driver and, if applicable, of the crew member is assessed at 75 kg (subdivided into 68 kg occupant mass and 7 kg luggage
mass according to ISO Standard 2416-1992), the fuel tank is filled to 90 % ant the other liquid containing systems (except those for used
water) to 100 % of the capacity specified by the manufacturer.

(b) For trailers or semi-trailers, and for vehicles coupled with a trailer or a semi-trailer, which exert a significant vertical load on the coupling
device or the fifth wheel, this load, divided by standard acceleration of gravity, is included in the maximum technical permissible mass.

(*) Please fill in here the upper and lower values for each variant.
(c)

In the case of non-conventional engines and systems, particulars equivalent to those referred to here shall be supplied by the manufac-
turer.

(**) Vehicles can be fuelled with both petrol and a gaseous fuel but, where the petrol system is fitted for emergency purposes or starting only
and of which the petrol tank cannot contain more than 15 litres of petrol, will be regarded for the test as vehicles which can only run a
gaseous fuel.

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).
(d) This figure must be rounded off to the nearest tenth of a millimetre.
(2) Specify the tolerance.
(e) Determined in accordance with the requirements of Directive 80/1269/EEC.

L 199/30

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.2.1.10.

Maximum net torque (a): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1 (manufacturer’s declared value)

3.2.2.

Fuel: Diesel/Petrol/LPG/NG-Biomethane/Ethanol(E85)/Biodiesel/Hydrogen (1)

3.2.2.2.

RON, unleaded: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.2.3.

Fuel tank inlet: restricted orifice/label (1)

3.2.2.4.

Vehicle fuel type: Mono fuel, Bi fuel, Flex fuel

3.2.2.5.

Maximum amount of biofuel acceptable in fuel (manufacturer’s declared value): . . . . . . . . . . . % by volume

3.2.4.

Fuel feed

3.2.4.2.

By fuel injection (compression ignition only): yes/no (1)

3.2.4.2.1.

System description: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.2.

Working principle: direct injection/pre-chamber/swirl chamber (1)

3.2.4.2.3.

Injection pump

3.2.4.2.3.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.3.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.3.3.

Maximum fuel delivery (1) (2) . mm3/stroke or cycle at an engine speed of: . min-1 or, alternatively, a char-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
acteristic diagram:

3.2.4.2.3.5.

Injection advance curve (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.4.

Governor

3.2.4.2.4.2.

Cut-off point

3.2.4.2.4.2.1.

Cut-off point under load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1

3.2.4.2.4.2.2.

Cut-off point without load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1

3.2.4.2.6.

Injector(s)

3.2.4.2.6.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.6.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.7.

Cold start system

3.2.4.2.7.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.7.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.7.3.

Description:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.8.

Auxiliary starting aid

3.2.4.2.8.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.8.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(a) Determined in accordance with the requirements of Directive 80/1269/EEC.
(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).
(2) Specify the tolerance.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/31

3.2.4.2.8.3.

System description: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.

Electronic controlled injection: yes/no (1)

3.2.4.2.9.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.

Description of the system, in the case of systems other than continuous injection give equivalent details:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.1.

Make and type of the control unit: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.2.

Make and type of the fuel regulator:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.3.

Make and type of air-flow sensor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.4.

Make and type of fuel distributor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.5.

Make and type of throttle housing:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.6.

Make and type of water temperature sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.7.

Make and type of air temperature sensor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.8.

Make and type of air pressure sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.

By fuel injection (positive ignition only): yes/no (1)

3.2.4.3.1.

Working principle: intake manifold (single-/multi-point (1))/direct injection/other (specify) (1) . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.2.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.3.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.

System description, in the case of systems other than continuous injection give equivalent details:

. . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.1.

Make and type of the control unit: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.3.

Make and type of air-flow sensor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.6.

Make and type of micro switch:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.8.

Make and type of throttle housing:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.9.

Make and type of water temperature sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.10.

Make and type of air temperature sensor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.11.

Make and type of air pressure sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.5.

Injectors: opening pressure (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa or characteristic diagram:

3.2.4.3.5.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.5.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).
(2) Specify the tolerance.

L 199/32

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.2.4.3.6.

Injection timing:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.7.

Cold start system

3.2.4.3.7.1.

Operating principle(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.7.2.

Operating limits/settings (1) (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.4.

Feed pump

3.2.4.4.1.

Pressure (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa or characteristic diagram (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.5.

Electrical system

3.2.5.1.

Rated voltage:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V, positive/negative ground (1)

3.2.5.2.

Generator

3.2.5.2.1.

Type:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.5.2.2.

Nominal output:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VA

3.2.6.

Ignition

3.2.6.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.6.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.6.3.

Working principle:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.6.4.

Ignition advance curve (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.6.5.

Static ignition timing (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . degrees before TDC

3.2.7.

Cooling system: liquid/air (1)

3.2.7.1.

Nominal setting of the engine temperature control mechanism: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.7.2.

Liquid

3.2.7.2.1.

Nature of liquid:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.7.2.2.

Circulating pump(s):yes/no (1)

3.2.7.2.3.

Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., or

3.2.7.2.3.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.7.2.3.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.7.2.4.

Drive ratio(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.7.2.5.

Description of the fan and its drive mechanism:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).
(2) Specify the tolerance.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/33

3.2.7.3.

Air

3.2.7.3.1.

Blower: yes/no (1)

3.2.7.3.2.

Characteristics: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., or

3.2.7.3.2.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.7.3.2.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.7.3.3.

Drive ratio(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.

Intake system

3.2.8.1.

Pressure charger: yes/no (1)

3.2.8.1.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.1.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.1.3.

Description of the system (e.g. maximum charge pressure: … kPa, wastegate if applicable): . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.2.

Intercooler: yes/no (1)

3.2.8.2.1.

Type: air-air/air-water (1)

3.2.8.3.

Intake depression at rated engine speed and at 100 % load (compression ignition engines only)

Minimum allowable:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

Maximum allowable: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

3.2.8.4.

Description and drawings of the inlet pipes and their accessories (plenum chamber, heating device, addi-
tional air intakes, etc.): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.4.1.

Intake manifold description (include drawings and/or photos):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.4.2.

Air filter, drawings:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or

3.2.8.4.2.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.4.2.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.4.3.

Intake silencer, drawings:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or

3.2.8.4.3.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.4.3.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.9.

Exhaust system

3.2.9.1.

Description and/or drawing of the exhaust manifold:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.9.2.

Description and/or drawing of the exhaust system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.9.3.

Maximum allowable exhaust back pressure at rated engine speed and at 100 % load (compression igni-
tion engines only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

L 199/34

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.2.10.

Minimum cross-sectional areas of inlet and outlet ports:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.11.

Valve timing or equivalent data

3.2.11.1.

Maximum lift of valves, angles of opening and closing, or timing details of alternative distribution sys-
. . . . . . . . .
tems, in relation to dead centres. For variable timing system, minimum and maximum timing:

3.2.11.2.

Reference and/or setting ranges (1):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.

Measures taken against air pollution

3.2.12.1.

Device for recycling crankcase gases (description and drawings): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.

Additional pollution control devices (if any, and if not covered by another heading)

3.2.12.2.1.

Catalytic converter: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.1.1.

Number of catalytic converters and elements (provide the information below for each separate unit): . .

3.2.12.2.1.2.

Dimensions, shape and volume of the catalytic converter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.3.

Type of catalytic action:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.4.

Total charge of precious metals: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.5.

Relative concentration:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.6.

Substrate (structure and material): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.7.

Cell density:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.8.

Type of casing for the catalytic converter(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.9.

Location of the catalytic converter(s) (place and reference distance in the exhaust line): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.10.

Heat shield: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.1.11.

Regeneration systems/method of exhaust after-treatment systems, description:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.1.

The number of Type 1 operating cycles, or equivalent engine test bench cycles, between two cycles where
regenerative phases occur under the conditions equivalent to Type 1 test (Distance ‘D’ in figure 1 in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83):

3.2.12.2.1.11.2. Description of method employed to determine the number of cycles between two cycles where regen-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

erative phases occur:

3.2.12.2.1.11.3.

Parameters to determine the level of loading required before regeneration occurs (i.e. temperature, pres-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sure etc.):

3.2.12.2.1.11.4. Description of method used to load system in the test procedure described in paragraph 3.1., Annex 13
to UN/ECE Regulation 83: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.5. Normal operating temperature range (K):

3.2.12.2.1.11.6.

Consumable reagents (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.7.

Type and concentration of reagent needed for catalytic action (where appropriate):

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/35

3.2.12.2.1.11.8. Normal operational temperature range of reagent (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.9.

International standard (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.10. Frequency of reagent refill: continuous/maintenance (1) (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.12.

Make of catalytic converter:

3.2.12.2.1.13.

Identifying part number:

3.2.12.2.2.

Oxygen sensor: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.2.1.

Type:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.2.2.

Location: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.2.3.

Control range:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.2.4.

Make of oxygen sensor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.2.5.

Identifying part number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.3.

Air injection: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.3.1.

Type (pulse air, air pump etc.):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.4.

Exhaust gas recirculation: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.4.1.

Characteristics (flow rate etc.):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.4.2.

Water cooled system: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.5.

Evaporative emissions control system: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.5.1.

Detailed description of the devices and their state of tune:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.5.2.

Drawing of the evaporative control system:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.5.3.

Drawing of the carbon canister:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.5.4.

Mass of dry charcoal:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g

3.2.12.2.5.5.

Schematic drawing of the fuel tank with indication of capacity and material:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.5.6.

Drawing of the heat shield between tank and exhaust system:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

3.2.12.2.6.

Particulate trap: yes/no (1)

3.2.12.2.6.1.

Dimensions, shape and capacity of the particulate trap:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.2.

Type and design of the particulate trap:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.3.

Location (reference distance in the exhaust line): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.4.

Method or system of regeneration, description and/or drawing:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.4.1.

The number of Type 1 operating cycles, or equivalent engine test bench cycle, between two cycles where
regeneration phases occur under the conditions equivalent to Type 1 test (Distance ‘D’ in figure 1 in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83):

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

L 199/36

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.2.12.2.6.4.2.

Description of method employed to determine the number of cycles between two cycles where regen-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
erative phases occur:

3.2.12.2.6.4.3.

Parameters to determine the level of loading required before regeneration occurs (i.e. temperature, pres-
sure, etc.): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.4.4.

Description of method used to load system in the test procedure described in paragraph 3.1., Annex 13
to UN/ECE Regulation 83: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.5.

Make of particulate trap: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.6.

Identifying part number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.

On-board-diagnostic (OBD) system: (yes/no) (1)

3.2.12.2.7.1.

Written description and/or drawing of the MI:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.2.

List and purpose of all components monitored by the OBD system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.

Written description (general working principles) for: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.

Positive-ignition engines (1)

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.1. Catalyst monitoring (1): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.2. Misfire detection (1): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.3. Oxygen sensor monitoring (1): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.1.4. Other components monitored by the OBD system (1): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.

Compression-ignition engines (1)

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.1. Catalyst monitoring (1): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.2.

Particulate trap monitoring (1):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.3.

Electronic fuelling system monitoring (1):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.3.2.4. Other components monitored by the OBD system (1): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.4.

Criteria for MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.5.

List of all OBD output codes and formats used (with explanation of each):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.7.6.

The following additional information shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer for the purposes of
enabling the manufacture of OBD-compatible replacement or service parts and diagnostic tools and test
equipment.

The information given in this section shall be repeated in Appendix 5 to this Annex (vehicle OBD infor-
mation appendix to the EC type-approval certificate):

3.2.12.2.7.6.1.

A description of the type and number of the pre-conditioning cycles used for the original type-approval
of the vehicle.

3.2.12.2.7.6.2.

A description of the type of the OBD demonstration cycle used for the original type-approval of the
vehicle for the component monitored by the OBD system.

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/37

3.2.12.2.7.6.3.

A comprehensive document describing all sensed components with the strategy for fault detection and
MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method), including a list of relevant secondary
sensed parameters for each component monitored by the OBD system. A list of all OBD output codes
and format used (with an explanation of each) associated with individual emission related power-train
components and individual non-emission related components, where monitoring of the component is
used to determine MI activation. In particular, a comprehensive explanation for the data given in service
$05 Test ID $21 to FF and the data given in service $06 shall be provided. In the case of vehicle types
that use a communication link in accordance with ISO 15765-4 ‘Road vehicles diagnostics on controller
area network (CAN) — part 4: requirements for emissions-related systems’, a comprehensive explana-
tion for the data given in service $06 Test ID $00 to FF, for each OBD monitor ID supported, shall be
provided.

3.2.12.2.7.6.4.

The information required by this section may, for example, be defined by completing a table as follows,
which shall be attached to this Annex.

Component

Fault code

Monitoring
strategy

Fault detec-
tion criteria

MI activation
criteria

Secondary
parameters

Precondition-
ing

Demonstra-
tion test

Catalyst

PO420

3rd cycle

Oxygen
sensor 1
and 2 sig-
nals

Difference
between
sensor 1
and sensor
2 signals

Engine
speed,
engine
load, A/F
mode, cata-
lyst tem-
perature

Two Type
1 cycles

Type 1

3.2.12.2.8.

Other systems (description and operation):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.13.

Location of the absorption coefficient symbol (compression ignition engines only): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.14.

Details of any devices designed to influence fuel economy (if not covered by other items): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.15.

LPG fuelling system: yes/no (1)

3.2.15.1.

EC type-approval number according to Council Directive 70/221/EEC (OJ L 76, 6.4.1970, p. 23) (when
the Directive will be amended to cover tanks for gaseous fuels) or approval number of UN/ECE Regula-
tion 67

3.2.15.2.

Electronic engine management control unit for LPG fuelling

3.2.15.2.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.15.2.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.15.2.3.

Emission-related adjustment possibilities:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.15.3.

Further documentation

3.2.15.3.1.

Description of the safeguarding of the catalyst at switch-over from petrol to LPG or back: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.15.3.2.

System lay-out (electrical connections, vacuum connections compensation hoses, etc.):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.15.3.3.

Drawing of the symbol:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

L 199/38

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.2.16.

NG fuelling system: yes/no (1)

3.2.16.1.

EC type-approval number according to Directive 70/221/EEC (when the Directive will be amended to
cover tanks for gaseous fuels) or approval number of UN/ECE Regulation 110: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.16.2.

Electronic engine management control unit for NG fuelling

3.2.16.2.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.16.2.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.16.2.3.

Emission-related adjustment possibilities:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.16.3.

Further documentations

3.2.16.3.1.

Description of the safeguarding of the catalyst at switch-over from petrol to NG or back:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.16.3.2.

System lay-out (electrical connections, vacuum connections compensation hoses, etc.):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.16.3.3.

Drawing of the symbol:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.

3.4.1.

3.4.2.

Engines or motor combinations

Hybrid Electric Vehicle: yes/no (1)

Category of Hybrid Electric vehicle

Off Vehicle Charging/Not Off Vehicle Charging (1)

3.4.3.

Operating mode switch: with/without (1)

3.4.3.1.

Selectable modes

3.4.3.1.1.

Pure electric: yes/no (1)

3.4.3.1.2.

Pure fuel consuming: yes/no (1)

3.4.3.1.3.

Hybrid modes: yes/no (1)

(if yes, short description)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.

Description of the energy storage device: (battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)

3.4.4.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.3.

Identification number:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.4.

Kind of electrochemical couple: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

3.4.4.5.

Energy: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (for battery: voltage and capacity Ah in 2 h, for capacitor: J, …)

3.4.4.6.

Charger: on board/external/without (1)

3.4.5.

Electric machines (describe each type of electric machine separately)

3.4.5.1.

Make: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/39

3.4.5.2.

Type:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

3.4.5.3.

Primary use: traction motor/generator

3.4.5.3.1.

When used as traction motor: monomotor/multimotors (number):

3.4.5.4.

Maximum power:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW

3.4.5.5.

Working principle:

3.4.5.5.1.

direct current/alternating current/number of phases:

3.4.5.5.2.

separate excitation/series/compound (1)

3.4.5.5.3.

synchronous/asynchronous (1)

3.4.6.

Control unit

3.4.6.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.6.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.6.3.

Identification number:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.7.

Power controller

3.4.7.1.

Make: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.7.2.

Type:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.7.3.

Identification number:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.8.

3.4.9.

3.5.

3.5.1.

3.5.1.1.

3.5.1.2.

3.5.1.3.

Vehicle electric range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km (according to Annex 7 of Regulation No 101):

Manufacturer’s recommendation for preconditioning: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CO2 emissions/fuel consumption (a) (manufacturer’s declared value)

CO2 mass emissions (provide for each reference fuel tested)

CO2 mass emissions (urban conditions):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

CO2 mass emissions (extra-urban conditions):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

CO2 mass emissions (combined): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

3.5.2.

Fuel consumption (provide for each reference fuel tested)

3.5.2.1.

3.5.2.2.

3.5.2.3.

3.6.

3.6.1.

Fuel consumption (urban conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/100 km or m3/100 km (1)

Fuel consumption (extra-urban conditions)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/100 km or m3/100 km (1)

Fuel consumption (combined)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/100 km or m3/100 km (1)

Temperatures permitted by the manufacturer

Cooling system

3.6.1.1.

Liquid cooling

Maximum temperature at outlet:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).
(a) Determined in accordance with the requirements of Directive 80/1268/EEC.

L 199/40

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.6.1.2.

Air cooling

3.6.1.2.1.

Reference point:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.1.2.2.

Maximum temperature at reference point:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

3.6.2.

3.6.3.

Maximum outlet temperature of the inlet intercooler:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

Maximum exhaust temperature at the point in the exhaust pipe(s) adjacent to the outer flange(s) of the
exhaust manifold: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

3.6.4.

Fuel temperature

Minimum: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

Maximum:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

3.6.5.

Lubricant temperature

Minimum: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

Maximum:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

3.8.

3.8.1.

Lubrication system

Description of the system

3.8.1.1.

Position of the lubricant reservoir:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.1.2.

Feed system (by pump/injection into intake/mixing with fuel, etc.) (1)

3.8.2.

Lubricating pump

3.8.2.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.2.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.3.

Mixture with fuel

3.8.3.1.

Percentage:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.4.

Oil cooler: yes/no (1)

3.8.4.1.

Drawing(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., or

3.8.4.1.1.

Make(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.4.1.2.

Type(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.

4.3.

4.3.1.

4.4.

4.4.1.

TRANSMISSION (a)

Moment of inertia of engine flywheel: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Additional moment of inertia with no gear engaged: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clutch (type): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maximum torque conversion: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).
(a)

(v) The specified particulars are to be given for any proposed variants.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/41

4.5.

4.5.1.

4.6.

Gearbox

Type (manual/automatic/CVT (continuously variable transmission)) (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gear ratios

Gear

Internal gearbox ratios
(ratios of engine to gear-
box output shaft revolu-
tions)

Final drive ratio(s) (ratio
of gearbox output shaft
to driven wheel revolu-
tions)

Total gear ratios

Maximum for CVT
1
2
3
…
Minimum for CVT (*)
Reverse

(*) CVT — continuously variable transmission.

6.

6.6.

SUSPENSION

Tyres and wheels

6.6.1.

Tyre/wheel combination(s)

(a)

(b)

for all tyre options indicate, size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling
resistance to ISO 28580 (where applicable)

for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h
equivalent information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s)

6.6.1.1.

Axles

6.6.1.1.1.

Axle 1:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.1.1.2.

Axle 2:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

etc.

6.6.2.

Upper and lower limits of rolling radii

6.6.2.1.

Axle 1:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6.2.2.

Axle 2:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

etc.

6.6.3.

Tyre pressure(s) as recommended by the vehicle manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

9.

9.1.

BODYWORK

Type of bodywork: (use codes defined in Annex II, section C of Directive 2007/46/EC):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.10.3.

Seats

9.10.3.1.

Number:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable).

L 199/42

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

16.

16.1.

ACCESS TO VEHICLE REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Address of principal website for access to vehicle repair and maintenance information:..

16.1.1.

Date from which it is available (no later than 6 months from the date of type approval):

16.2.

16.3.

Terms and conditions of access to website referred to in Section 16.1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Format of vehicle repair and maintenance information accessible through website referred to in Sec-
tion 16.1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/43

Appendix to information document

INFORMATION ON TEST CONDITIONS

1.

Spark plugs

1.1. Make:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.

Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.

Spark-gap setting:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.

Ignition coil

2.1. Make: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

2.2.

Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.

Lubricant used

3.1. Make:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.

Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(state percentage of oil in mixture if lubricant and fuel mixed)

4

Dynamometer load setting information (repeat information for each dynamometer test)

4.1.

Vehicle bodywork type (variant/version)

4.2.

Gearbox type (manual/automatic/CVT)

4.3.

Fixed load curve dynamometer setting information (if used)

4.3.1. Alternative dynamometer load setting method used (yes/no)

4.3.2.

Inertia mass (kg):

4.3.3. Effective power absorbed at 80km/h including running losses of the vehicle on the dynamometer (kW)

4.3.4. Effective power absorbed at 50km/h h including running losses of the vehicle on the dynamometer (kW)

4.4.

Adjustable load curve dynamometer setting information (if used)

4.4.1. Coast down information from the test track.

4.4.2. Tyres make and type:

4.4.3. Tyre dimensions (front/rear):

4.4.4. Tyre pressure (front/rear) (kPa):

4.4.5. Vehicle test mass including driver (kg):

L 199/44

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

4.4.6. Road coast down data (if used)

V (km/h)

V2 (km/h)

V1 (km/h)

Mean corrected coast down time (s)

120

100

80

60

40

20

4.4.7. Average corrected road power (if used)

V (km/h)

CPcorrected (kW)

120

100

80

60

40

20

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/45

Appendix 4

MODEL OF EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

(Maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

Stamp of administration

Communication concerning the:

— EC type-approval (1),

— extension of EC type-approval (1),

— refusal of EC type-approval (1),

— withdrawal of EC type-approval (1),

of a type of system/type of a vehicle with regard to a system (1) with regard to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 (2) and Regu-
lation (EC) No 692/2008 (3)

EC type-approval number:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reason for extension: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION I

0.1. Make (trade name of manufacturer): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.2.

Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.2.1. Commercial name(s) (if available):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.3. Means of identification of type if marked on the vehicle (4)

0.3.1. Location of that marking:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.4.

Category of vehicle (5)

0.5.

Name and address of manufacturer:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.8.

Name(s) and address(es) of assembly plant(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.9.

Representative of the manufacturer:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable)
(2) OJ L 171, 29.6.2007, p. 1.
(3) OJ L 199, 28.7.2008, p. 1
(4)

If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types
covered by this information, such characters shall be represented in the documentation by the symbol ‘?’ (e.g. ABC??123??)

(5) As defined in Annex II, Section A

L 199/46

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

SECTION II

1. Additional information (where applicable): (see addendum)

2. Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Date of test report:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Number of test report:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Remarks (if any): (see addendum)

6. Place:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. Signature:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attachments:

Information package.
Test report.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/47

Addendum to EC type-approval certificate No …

concerning the type-approval of a vehicle with regard to emissions and access to vehicle repair and
maintenance information according to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

1.

1.1.

1.2.

1.3.

1.4.

1.6.

Additional information

Mass of the vehicle in running order:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maximum mass:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reference mass:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Number of seats: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type of bodywork:

1.6.1.

for M1, M2: saloon, hatchback, station wagon, coupé, convertible, multipurpose vehicle (1)

1.6.2.

for N1, N2: lorry, van (1)

1.7.

1.8.

1.9.

Drive wheels: front, rear, 4 x 4 (1)

Pure electric vehicle: yes/no (1)

Hybrid electric vehicle: yes/no (1)

1.9.1.

Category of Hybrid Electric vehicle: Off Vehicle Charging/Not Off Vehicle charging (1)

1.9.2.

Operating mode switch: with/without (1)

1.10.

Engine identification:

1.10.1.

Engine displacement:

1.10.2.

Fuel supply system: direct injection/indirect injection (1)

1.10.3.

Fuel recommended by the manufacturer:

1.10.4.

Maximum power: kW at min’

1.10.5.

Pressure charging device: yes/no (1)

1.10.6.

Ignition system: compression ignition/positive ignition (1)

1.11.

Power train (for pure electric vehicle or hybrid electric vehicle) (1)

1.11.1.

Maximum net power:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW, at:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1

1.11.2.

Maximum thirty minutes power:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW

1.12.

Traction battery (for pure electric vehicle or hybrid electric vehicle)

1.12.1.

Nominal voltage: V

1.12.2.

Capacity (2 h rate): Ah

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

L 199/48

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

1.13.

Transmission: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.13.1.

Type of gearbox: manual/automatic/variable transmission (1)

1.13.2.

Number of gear ratios:

1.13.3.

Total gear ratios (including the rolling circumferences of the tyres under load): road speeds per 1 000 min-1
(km/h)

First gear:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sixth gear:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Second gear: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seventh gear:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Third gear: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Eighth gear: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fourth gear:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overdrive:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fifth gear: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.13.4.

Final drive ratio:

1.14.

Tyres: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rolling circumference under load:

Rolling circumference of tyres used for the Type 1 test

2.

Test results

2.1.

Tailpipe emissions test results

Emissions classification: Euro 5/Euro 6 (1)

Type 1 test results, where applicable

Type approval number if not parent vehicle (1):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type 1 Result

Test

CO
(mg/km)

THC
(mg/km)

NMHC
(mg/km)

NOx
(mg/km)

THC + NOx
(mg/km)

Particu-
lates
(mg/km)

Particles
(#/km)

1

2

3

Measured (i) (iv)

Measured mean
value (M) (i) (iv)

Ki (i) (v)

Mean value calcu-
lated with Ki
(M.Ki) (iv)

DF (i) (v)

Final mean value
calculated with Ki
and DF (M.Ki.DF) (vi)

Limit value

(ii)

(iii)

(i) Where applicable.
(ii) Not applicable.
(iii) Mean value calculated by adding mean values (M.Ki) calculated for THC and NOx.
(iv) Round to 2 decimal places.
(v) Round to 4 decimal places.
(vi) Round to 1 decimal place more than limit value.

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/49

Information about regeneration strategy

D — number of operating cycles between 2 cycles where regenerative phases occur:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

d — number of operating cycles required for regeneration:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type 2:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . %

Type 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type 4: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/test

Type 5: — Durability test: whole vehicle test/bench ageing test/none (1)

— Deterioration factor DF: calculated/assigned (1)

— Specify the values: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type 6

CO (mg/km)

THC (mg/km)

Measured value

2.1.1.

Repeat the table for mono fuel gas vehicles for all reference gases of LPG or NG/biomethane, showing if the
results are measured or calculated and repeat the table for the (one) final result of the vehicle emissions on LPG
or NG/biomethane. In case of a bi fuel gas vehicle, show the result for petrol and repeat the table for all reference
gases of LPG or NG/biomethane, showing if the result are measured or calculated and repeat the table for the
(one) final result of the vehicle emissions on LPG or NG/biomethane. In the case of other bi fuel and flex fuel
vehicles, show the results on the two different reference fuels.

2.1.2.

Written description and/or drawing of the MI:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.3.

List and function of all components monitored by the OBD system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.

Written description (general working principles) for:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.1. Misfire detection (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.2.

Catalyst monitoring (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.3.

Oxygen sensor monitoring (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.4.

Other components monitored by the OBD system (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.5.

Catalyst monitoring (3):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.6.

Particulate trap monitoring (3): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.7.

Electronic fuelling system actuator monitoring (3): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.4.8.

Other components monitored by the OBD system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.5.

Criteria for MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.6.

List of all OBD output codes and formats used (with explanation of each):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)
(2) For vehicles equipped with positive-ignition engines.
(3) For compression-ignition engine vehicles

L 199/50

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

2.2.

Emissions data required for roadworthiness testing

Test

CO value
(% vol)

Engine speed
(min-)

Engine oil tem-
perature
(°C)

Lambda (1)

N/A

Low idle test

High idle test

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

2.3.

Catalytic converters yes/no (1)

2.3.1.

Original equipment catalytic converter tested to all relevant requirements of this Regulation yes/no (1)

2.4.

Smoke opacity test results (1)

2.4.1.

At steady speeds: See technical service test report number:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.2.

Free acceleration tests

2.4.2.1. Measured value of the absorption coefficient: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m-1

2.4.2.2.

Corrected value of the absorption coefficient:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m-1

2.4.2.3.

Location of the absorption coefficient symbol on the vehicle: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.

CO2 emissions and fuel consumption test results

2.5.1.

Internal combustion engine vehicle and Not Externally Chargeable (NOVC) Hybrid Electric Vehicle

2.5.1.1.

CO2 mass emissions (provide declared values for each reference fuel tested)

2.5.1.1.1. CO2 mass emissions (urban conditions): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

2.5.1.1.2. CO2 mass emissions (extra-urban conditions): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

2.5.1.1.3. CO2 mass emissions (combined):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

2.5.1.2.

Fuel consumption (provide declared values for each reference fuel tested)

2.5.1.2.1. Fuel consumption (urban conditions):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/100 km (2)

2.5.1.2.2. Fuel consumption (extra-urban conditions): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/100 km

2.5.1.2.3. Fuel consumption (combined):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/100 km (2)

2.5.1.3.

For vehicles powered by an internal combustion engine only which are equipped with periodically regenerating
systems as defined in paragraph 6 of Article 2 of this Regulation, the test results shall be multiplied by the factor
Ki as specified in Annex 10 to UN/ECE Regulation 101.

2.5.1.3.1.

Information about regeneration strategy for CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

D — number of operating cycles between 2 cycles where regenerative phases occur:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)
(2) For vehicle fuelled with gas the unit is replaced by m3/km.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/51

d — number of operating cycles required for regeneration:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

urban

extra urban

combined

Ki

Values for CO2

and fuel consumption (1)

(1) Round to 4 decimal places.

2.5.2.

Pure electric vehicles (1)

2.5.2.1.

Electric energy consumption (declared value).

2.5.2.1.1. Electric energy consumption: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wh/km

2.5.2.1.2. Total time out of tolerance for the conduct of the cycle:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sec

2.5.2.2.

Range (declared value):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km

2.5.3.

Externally chargeable (OVC) Hybrid Electric Vehicle:

2.5.3.1.

CO2 mass emission (Condition A, combined) (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

2.5.3.2.

CO2 mass emission (Condition B, combined) (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

2.5.3.3.

CO2 mass emission (weighted, combined) (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g/km

2.5.3.4.

Fuel consumption (Condition A, combined) (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/100 km

2.5.3.5.

Fuel consumption (Condition B, combined) (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/100 km

2.5.3.6.

Fuel consumption (weighted, combined) (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/100 km

2.5.3.7.

Electric energy consumption (Condition A, combined) (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wh/km

2.5.3.8.

Electric energy consumption (Condition B, combined) (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wh/km

2.5.3.9.

Electric energy consumption (weighted and combined) (2):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wh/km

2.5.3.10.

Pure electric range: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km

3.

Vehicle repair information

3.1.

Address of website for access to vehicle repair and maintenance information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1.

Date from which it is available (up to 6 months from the date of type approval): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.

3.3.

3.4.

4.

Terms and conditions of access (i.e., duration of access, price of access on a hourly, daily, monthly and annual
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
basis) to website referred to in Section 3.1:

Format of vehicle repair and maintenance information accessible through website referred to in Section 3.1:

. .

Manufacturer’s certificate on access to vehicle repair and maintenance information provided:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remarks:

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)
(2) Measured over the combined cycle, i.e. Part One (urban) and Part Two (extra urban) together

L 199/52

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 5

Vehicle OBD information

1.

2.

The information required in this Appendix shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer for the purposes of enabling
the manufacture of OBD-compatible replacement or service parts and diagnostic tools and test equipment.

Upon request, the following information shall be made available to any interested component, diagnostic tools or test
equipment manufacturer, on a non-discriminatory basis:

2.1. A description of the type and number of the preconditioning cycles used for the original type-approval of the vehicle;

2.2. A description of the type of the OBD demonstration cycle used for the original type-approval of the vehicle for the

component monitored by the OBD system;

2.3. A comprehensive document describing all sensed components with the strategy for fault detection and MI activation
(fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method), including a list of relevant secondary sensed parameters for each
component monitored by the OBD system and a list of all OBD output codes and format used (with an explanation of
each) associated with individual emission-related power-train components and individual non-emission related com-
ponents, where monitoring of the component is used to determine MI activation. In particular, a comprehensive expla-
nation for the data given in service $ 05 Test ID $ 21 to FF and the data given in service $ 06 shall be provided. In the
case of vehicle types that use a communication link in accordance with ISO 15765-4 ‘Road vehicles — Diagnostics on
Controller Area Network (CAN) — Part 4: Requirements for emissions-related systems’, a comprehensive explanation
for the data given in service $ 06 Test ID $ 00 to FF, for each OBD monitor ID supported, shall be provided.

This information may be provided in the form of a table, as follows:

Component

Fault code

Monitoring
strategy

Fault detec-
tion criteria

MI activation
criteria

Secondary
parameters

Precondition-
ing

Demonstra-
tion test

Catalyst

P0420

3rd cycle

Oxygen
sensor 1
and 2 sig-
nals

Difference
between
sensor 1
and sensor
2 signals

Engine
speed,
engine load,
A/F mode,
catalyst
temperature

Two Type 1
cycles

Type 1

3.

Information required for the manufacture of diagnostic tools

In order to facilitate the provision of generic diagnostic tools for multi-make repairers, vehicle manufacturers shall
make available the information referred to in the points 3.1 to 3.3. through their repair information web-sites. This
information shall include all diagnostic tool functions and all the links to repair information and troubleshooting
instructions. The access to this information may be subject to the payment of a reasonable fee.

3.1. Communication Protocol Information

The following information shall be required indexed against vehicle make, model and variant, or other workable defi-
nition such as VIN or vehicle and systems identification:

(a) Any additional protocol information system necessary to enable complete diagnostics in addition to the stan-
dards prescribed in Annex XI Section 4, including any additional hardware or software protocol information,
parameter identification, transfer functions, ‘keep alive’ requirements, or error conditions;

(b) Details of how to obtain and interpret all fault codes not in accordance with the standards prescribed in Annex XI

Section 4:

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/53

(c) A list of all available live data parameters including scaling and access information;

(d) A list of all available functional tests including device activation or control and the means to implement them;

(e) Details of how to obtain all component and status information, time stamps, pending DTC and freeze frames;

(f)

Resetting adaptive learning parameters, variant coding and replacement component setup, and customer
preferences;

(g)

ECU identification and variant coding;

(h) Details of how to reset service lights;

(i)

Location of diagnostic connector and connector details;

(j)

Engine code identification.

3.2. Test and diagnosis of OBD monitored components

The following information shall be required:

(a) A description of tests to confirm its functionality, at the component or in the harness

(b) Test procedure including test parameters and component information

(c) Connection details including minimum and maximum input and output and driving and loading values

(d) Values expected under certain driving conditions including idling

(e)

Electrical values for the component in its static and dynamic states

(f)

Failure mode values for each of the above scenarios

(g)

Failure mode diagnostic sequences including fault trees and guided diagnostics elimination.

3.3. Data required to perform the repair

The following information shall be required:

(a)

ECU and component initialisation (in the event of replacements being fitted)

(b)

Initialisation of new or replacement ECU’s where relevant using pass-through (re-) programming techniques.

L 199/54

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 6

EC Type –Approval Certification Numbering System

1.

Section 3 of the EC type-approval number issued according to Article 6(1) shall be composed by the number of the implementing regulatory act or
the latest amending regulatory act applicable to the EC type-approval. This number shall be followed by an alphabetical character reflecting the dif-
ferent vehicle categories in accordance with table 1 below. These alphabetical characters shall also distinguish the Euro 5 and 6 emission limit values
to which the approval was granted.

Character

Emissions
standard

OBD
standard

Vehicle category and class

Engine

Implementation
date: new types

Implementation
date: new
vehicles

Last date of
registration

Table 1

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

Euro 5a

Euro 5a

Euro 5a

Euro 5a

Euro 5a

Euro 5b

Euro 5b

Euro 5b

Euro 5b

Euro 5

Euro 5

Euro 5

Euro 5

Euro 5

Euro 5

Euro 5

Euro 5

Euro 5

M, N1 class I.

PI, CI

1.9.2009

1.1.2011

31.12.2012

M1 to fulfil specific social needs
(excluding M1G)

CI

1.9.2009

1.1.2012

31.12.2012

M1G to fulfil specific social needs

CI

1.9.2009

1.1.2012

31.8.2012

N1 class II

N1 class III, N2

M, N1 class I.

M1 to fulfil specific social needs
(excluding M1G)

PI, CI

1.9.2010

1.1.2012

31.12.2012

PI, CI

1.9.2010

1.1.2012

31.12.2012

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2013

31.12.2013

CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2013

31.12.2013

N1 class II

N1 class III, N2

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2013

31.12.2013

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2013

31.12.2013

Euro 5b

Euro 5+

M, N1 class I.

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2014

31.8.2015

Euro 5b

Euro 5+

M1 to fulfil specific social needs
(excluding M1G)

CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2014

31.8.2015

Euro 5b

Euro 5+

N1 class II

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2014

31.8.2016

Euro 5b

Euro 5+

N1 class III, N2

PI, CI

1.9.2011

1.1.2014

31.8.2016

Euro 6a

Euro 6a

Euro 6a

Euro 6-

Euro 6-

Euro 6-

M, N1 class I

N1 class II

N1 class III, N2

Euro 6b

Euro 6-

M, N1 class I

Euro 6b

Euro 6-

N1 class II

Euro 6b

Euro 6-

N1 class III, N2

Euro 6b

Euro 6b

Euro 6b

Euro 6-plus
IUPR

Euro 6-plus
IUPR

Euro 6-plus
IUPR

M, N1 class I

N1 class II

N1 class III, N2

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

CI

31.12.2012

31.12.2012

31.12.2012

31.12.2013

31.12.2013

31.12.2013

31.8.2015

31.8.2016

31.8.2016

W

Euro 6b

Euro 6

M, N1 class I

PI, CI

1.9.2014

1.9.2015

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/55

Character

Emissions
standard

OBD
standard

Vehicle category and class

Engine

Implementation
date: new types

Implementation
date: new
vehicles

Last date of
registration

X

Y

Euro 6b

Euro 6b

Euro 6

Euro 6

N1 class II

N1 class III, N2

PI, CI

1.9.2015

1.9.2016

PI, CI

1.9.2015

1.9.2016

Key:
‘Euro 5a’ emissions standard = excludes revised measurement procedure for particulates, particle number standard and flex fuel vehicle low temperature emission testing

with biofuel.

‘Euro 6a’ emissions standard = excludes revised measurement procedure for particulates, particle number standard and flex fuel vehicle low temperature emission testing

with biofuel.

‘Euro 5+’ OBD standards = includes relaxed in use performance ratio (IUPR), NOx monitoring for petrol vehicles and tightened PM threshold limits for diesel.
‘Euro 6-’ OBD standards = relaxed diesel OBD threshold limits, no in use performance ratio (IUPR).
‘Euro 6- plus IUPR’ OBD = includes relaxed diesel OBD threshold limits and relaxed in use performance ratio (IUPR)
Note: Article 4(7) only permits type-approvals according to characters W, X and Y to be performed once Euro 6 OBD thresholds have been introduced.

2.

Examples of type–approval certification numbers.

2.1. An example is provided below of a first approval without any extensions of an Euro 5 light passenger vehicle. The approval was granted to the base
regulation and its implementing regulation so the forth component is 0001. The vehicle is of category M1 represented by letter A. The approval was
issued by the Netherlands:

e4*715/2007*692/2008A*0001*00

2.2. This second example shows a fourth approval for the second extension of an Euro 5 light passenger vehicle of category M1G meeting the special
social needs requirements (letter C). The approval was granted to the base regulation and an amending regulation in the year 2009 and was issued by
Germany:

e1*715/2007*…/2009C*0004*02

L 199/56

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 7

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/57

ANNEX II

IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY

1.

Introduction

1.1.

This Annex sets out the in-service conformity requirements for vehicles type approved to this Regulation.

2.

Audit of in-service conformity

2.1.

2.2.

2.3.

The audit of in-service conformity by the approval authority shall be conducted on the basis of any relevant infor-
mation that the manufacturer has, under the same procedures as those for the conformity of production defined in
Article 12(1) and (2) of Directive 2007/46/EC and in points 1 and 2 of Annex X to that Directive. Information from
approval authority and Member State surveillance testing may complement the in-service monitoring reports sup-
plied by the manufacturer.

The figure referred to under point 9 of Appendix 2 to this Annex and Figure 4/2 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regu-
lation 83 illustrates the procedure for in-service conformity checking. The process for in-service conformity is
described in Appendix 3 to this Annex.

As part of the information provided for the in-service conformity control, at the request of the approval authority,
the manufacturer shall report to the type-approval authority on warranty claims, warranty repair works and OBD
faults recorded at servicing, according to a format agreed at type-approval. The information shall detail the fre-
quency and substance of faults for emissions related components and systems. The reports shall be filed at least
once a year for each vehicle model for the duration of the period defined in Article 9(4) of this Regulation.

2.4.

Parameters defining the in-service family

The in-service family may be defined by basic design parameters which shall be common to vehicles within the
family. Accordingly, vehicle types may be considered as belonging to the same in-service family if they have in com-
mon, or within the stated tolerances, the following parameters:

2.4.1.

combustion process (two stroke, four stroke, rotary);

2.4.2.

number of cylinders;

2.4.3.

configuration of the cylinder block (in-line, V, radial, horizontally opposed, other). The inclination or orientation
of the cylinders is not a criteria);

2.4.4. method of engine fuelling (e.g. indirect or direct injection);

2.4.5.

type of cooling system (air, water, oil);

2.4.6. method of aspiration (naturally aspirated, pressure charged);

2.4.7.

fuel for which the engine is designed (petrol, diesel, NG, LPG, etc.). Bi fuelled vehicles may be grouped with dedi-
cated fuel vehicles providing one of the fuels is common;

2.4.8.

type of catalytic converter (three-way catalyst, lean NOx trap, SCR, lean NOx catalyst or other(s));

2.4.9.

type of particulate trap (with or without);

2.4.10. exhaust gas recirculation (with or without, cooled or non cooled); and

L 199/58

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

2.4.11. engine cylinder capacity of the largest engine within the family minus 30 %.

2.5.

Information requirements

An audit of in-service conformity will be conducted by the approval authority on the basis of information supplied
by the manufacturer. Such information shall include in particular, the following:

2.5.1.

the name and address of the manufacturer;

2.5.2.

the name, address, telephone and fax numbers and e-mail address of his authorised representative within the areas
covered by the manufacturer’s information;

2.5.3.

the model name(s) of the vehicles included in the manufacturer’s information;

2.5.4. where appropriate, the list of vehicle types covered within the manufacturer’s information, i.e. the in-service family

group in accordance with section 2.1;

2.5.5.

the vehicle identification number (VIN) codes applicable to these vehicle types within the in-service family (VIN
prefix);

2.5.6.

the numbers of the type-approvals applicable to these vehicle types within the in-service family, including, where
applicable, the numbers of all extensions and field fixes/recalls (re-works);

2.5.7.

details of extensions, field fixes/recalls to those type-approvals for the vehicles covered within the manufacturer’s
information (if requested by the approval authority);

2.5.8.

the period of time over which the manufacturer’s information was collected;

2.5.9.

the vehicle build period covered within the manufacturer’s information (e.g. vehicles manufactured during the 2007
calendar year);

2.5.10.

the manufacturer’s in-service conformity checking procedure, including:

(a)

vehicle location method;

(b)

vehicle selection and rejection criteria;

(c)

test types and procedures used for the programme;

(d)

the manufacturer’s acceptance/rejection criteria for the in-service family group;

(e)

geographical area(s) within which the manufacturer has collected information;

(f)

sample size and sampling plan used;

2.5.11.

the results from the manufacturer’s in-service conformity procedure, including:

(a)

identification of the vehicles included in the programme (whether tested or not). The identification shall
include the following:

— model name,

— vehicle identification number (VIN),

— vehicle registration number,

— date of manufacture,

— region of use (where known),

— tyres fitted,

(b)

the reason(s) for rejecting a vehicle from the sample;

(c)

service history for each vehicle in the sample (including any re-works);

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/59

(d)

repair history for each vehicle in the sample (where known);

(e)

test data, including the following:

— date of test,

— location of test,

— distance indicated on vehicle odometer,

— test fuel specifications (e.g. test reference fuel or market fuel),

— test conditions (temperature, humidity, dynamometer inertia weight),

— dynamometer settings (e.g. power setting),

— test results (from at least three different vehicles per family),

2.5.12.

records of indication from the OBD system.

3.

Selection of vehicles for in-service conformity

3.1.

3.2.

3.3.

3.4.

The information gathered by the manufacturer shall be sufficiently comprehensive to ensure that in-service per-
formance can be assessed for normal conditions of use as defined in section 1. The manufacturer’s sampling shall
be drawn from at least two Member States with substantially different vehicle operating conditions. Factors such as
differences in fuels, ambient conditions, average road speeds, and urban/highway driving split shall be taken into
consideration in the selection of the Member States.

In selecting the Member States for sampling vehicles, the manufacturer may select vehicles from a Member State
that is considered to be particularly representative. In this case, the manufacturer shall demonstrate to the approval
authority which granted the type approval that the selection is representative (e.g. by the market having the largest
annual sales of a vehicle family within the Community). When an in-service family requires more than one sample
lot to be tested as defined in paragraph 3.5., the vehicles in the second and third sample lots shall reflect different
vehicle operating conditions from those selected for the first sample.

The emissions testing may be done at a test facility which is located in a different market or region from where the
vehicles have been selected.

The in-service conformity tests by the manufacturer shall be continuously carried out reflecting the production cycle
of applicable vehicles types within a given in-service vehicle family. The maximum time period between commenc-
ing two in-service conformity checks shall not exceed 18 months. In the case of vehicle types covered by an exten-
sion to the type-approval that did not require an emissions test, this period may be extended up to 24 months.

3.5.

When applying the statistical procedure defined in Appendix 2, the number of sample lots shall depend on the
annual sales volume of an in-service family in the Community, as defined in the following table:

Registrations per calendar year

up to 100 000

100 001 to 200 000

above 200 000

Number of
sample lots

1

2

3

4.

On the basis of the audit referred to in Section 2 the approval authority shall adopt one of the following decisions
and actions:

(a)

decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type or a vehicle in-service family is satisfactory and not take
any further action;

(b) decide that the data provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional

information or test data from the manufacturer;

L 199/60

EN

(c)

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

decide that based on data from the approval authority or Member State surveillance testing programmes, that
information provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional informa-
tion or test data from the manufacturer;

(d) decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type, that is part of an in-service family, is unsatisfactory and

proceed to have such vehicle type tested in accordance with Appendix 1.

4.1.

4.2.

4.3.

Where type 1 tests are considered necessary to check the conformity of emission control devices with the require-
ments for their performance while in service, such tests shall be carried out using a test procedure meeting the sta-
tistical criteria defined in Appendix 2

The approval authority, in cooperation with the manufacturer, shall select a sample of vehicles with sufficient mile-
age whose use under normal conditions can be reasonably assured. The manufacturer shall be consulted on the
choice of the vehicles in the sample and allowed to attend the confirmatory checks of the vehicles.

The manufacturer shall be authorised, under the supervision of the approval authority, to carry out checks, even of
a destructive nature, on those vehicles with emission levels in excess of the limit values with a view to establishing
possible causes of deterioration which cannot be attributed to the manufacturer (e.g. use of leaded petrol before the
test date) Where the results of the checks confirm such causes, those test results shall be excluded from the con-
formity check.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/61

Appendix 1

IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY CHECK

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1.

This Appendix sets out the criteria referred to in Section 4 regarding the selection of vehicles for testing and the
procedures for the in-service conformity control.

2.

SELECTION CRITERIA

The criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle are defined in sections 2.1 to 2.8.

2.1.

2.2.

2.3.

2.4.

The vehicle shall belong to a vehicle type that is type-approved under this Regulation and covered by a certificate
of conformity in accordance with Directive 2007/46/EC. It shall be registered and have been used in the
Community.

The vehicle shall have been in service for at least 15 000 km or 6 months, whichever the later, and for no more
than 100 000 km or 5 years, whichever the sooner.

There shall be a maintenance record to show that the vehicle has been properly maintained (e.g. has been serviced
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations)

The vehicle shall exhibit no indications of abuse (e. g. racing, overloading, misfuelling, or other misuse), or other
factors (e. g. tampering) that could affect emission performance. In the case of vehicles fitted with an OBD system,
the fault code and mileage information stored in the computer shall be taken into account. A vehicle shall not be
selected for testing if the information stored in the computer shows that the vehicle has operated after a fault code
was stored and a relatively prompt repair was not carried out.

2.5.

There shall have been no unauthorised major repair to the engine or major repair of the vehicle.

2.6.

The lead content and sulphur content of a fuel sample from the vehicle tank shall meet the applicable standards
laid down in Directive 98/70/EC (1) and there shall be no evidence of mis-fuelling. Checks may be done in the
tailpipe.

2.7.

There shall be no indication of any problem that might jeopardize the safety of laboratory personnel.

2.8.

All anti-pollution system components on the vehicle shall be in conformity with the applicable type-approval.

3.

DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE

Diagnosis and any normal maintenance necessary shall be performed on vehicles accepted for testing, prior to mea-
suring exhaust emissions, in accordance with the procedure laid down in points 3.1 to 3.7.

3.1.

3.2.

The following checks shall be carried out: checks on air filter, all drive belts, all fluid levels, radiator cap, all vacuum
hoses and electrical wiring related to the antipollution system for integrity; checks on ignition, fuel metering and
pollution control device components for maladjustments and/or tampering. All discrepancies shall be recorded.

The OBD system shall be checked for proper functioning. Any malfunction indications in the OBD memory shall
be recorded and the requisite repairs shall be carried out. If the OBD malfunction indicator registers a malfunction
during a preconditioning cycle, the fault may be identified and repaired. The test may be re-run and the results of
that repaired vehicle used.

(1) OJ L 350, 28.12.1998, p. 58.

L 199/62

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.3.

The ignition system shall be checked and defective components replaced, for example spark plugs, cables, etc.

3.4.

The compression shall be checked. If the result is unsatisfactory the vehicle shall be rejected.

3.5.

The engine parameters shall be checked to the manufacturer’s specifications and adjusted if necessary.

3.6.

If the vehicle is within 800 km of a scheduled maintenance service, that service shall be performed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Regardless of odometer reading, the oil and air filter may be changed at the request of
the manufacturer.

3.7.

Upon acceptance of the vehicle, the fuel shall be replaced with appropriate emission test reference fuel, unless the
manufacturer accepts the use of market fuel.

4.

IN-SERVICE TESTING

4.1.

4.2.

4.3.

4.4.

When a check on vehicles is deemed necessary, emission tests in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation are
performed on pre-conditioned vehicles selected in accordance with the requirements of sections 2 and 3 of this
Appendix. This test shall only include the measurement of particle number emissions for vehicles approved to the
Euro 6 emission standards in categories W, X and Y as defined in Table 1 of Appendix 6 to Annex 1 of this Regu-
lation. Pre-conditioning cycles additional to those specified in Section 5.3. of Annex 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83
will only be allowed if they are representative of normal driving.

Vehicles equipped with an OBD system may be checked for proper in-service functionality, of the malfunction indi-
cation, etc., in relation to levels of emissions (e.g. the malfunction indication limits defined in Annex XI to this Regu-
lation) for the type-approved specifications.

The OBD system may be checked, for example, for levels of emissions above the applicable limit values with no
malfunction indication, systematic erroneous activation of the malfunction indication and identified faulty or dete-
riorated components in the OBD system.

If a component or system operates in a manner not covered by the particulars in the type-approval certificate and/or
information package for such vehicle types and such deviation has not been authorized under Article 13(1) or (2)
of Directive 2007/46/EC, with no malfunction indication by the OBD, the component or system shall not be
replaced prior to emission testing, unless it is determined that the component or system has been tampered with or
abused in such a manner that the OBD does not detect the resulting malfunction.

5.

EVALUATION OF RESULTS

5.1.

The test results shall be submitted to the evaluation procedure in accordance with Appendix 2.

5.2.

Test results shall not be multiplied by deterioration factors.

6.

PLAN OF REMEDIAL MEASURES

6.1.

The approval authority shall request the manufacturer to submit a plan of remedial measures to remedy the non-
compliance when more than one vehicle is found to be an outlying emitter that meets either of the following
conditions:

(a)

the conditions set out in section 3.2.3 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and where both the approval
authority and the manufacturer agree that the excess emission is due to the same cause, or

(b)

the conditions set out in section 3.2.4 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 where the approval authority
has determined that the excess emission is due to the same cause.

6.2.

The plan of remedial measures shall be filed with the type-approval authority not later than 60 working days from
the date of the notification referred to in section 6.1. The type-approval authority shall within 30 working days
declare its approval or disapproval of the plan of remedial measures. However, where the manufacturer can dem-
onstrate, to the satisfaction of the competent approval authority, that further time is required to investigate the non-
compliance in order to submit a plan of remedial measures, an extension shall be granted.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/63

6.3.

6.4.

6.5.

The remedial measures shall apply to all vehicles likely to be affected by the same defect. The need to amend the
type-approval documents shall be assessed.

The manufacturer shall provide a copy of all communications related to the plan of remedial measures, and shall
also maintain a record of the recall campaign, and supply regular status reports to the approval authority.

The plan of remedial measures shall include the requirements specified in points 6.5.1 to 6.5.11. The manufacturer
shall assign a unique identifying name or number to the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.1. A description of each vehicle type included in the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.2. A description of the specific modifications, alterations, repairs, corrections, adjustments or other changes to be
made to bring the vehicles into conformity including a brief summary of the data and technical studies which sup-
port the decision of the manufacturer as to the particular measures to be taken to correct the non-conformity.

6.5.3. A description of the method by which the manufacturer informs the vehicle owners.

6.5.4. A description of the proper maintenance or use, if any, which the manufacturer stipulates as a condition of eligi-
bility for repair under the plan of remedial measures, and an explanation of the reasons why the manufacturer
imposes any such condition. No maintenance or use conditions may be imposed unless it is demonstrably related
to the non-conformity and the remedial measures.

6.5.5. A description of the procedure to be followed by vehicle owners to obtain correction of the non-conformity. This
description shall include a date after which the remedial measures may be taken, the estimated time for the work-
shop to perform the repairs and where they can be done. The repair shall be done expediently, within a reasonable
time after delivery of the vehicle.

6.5.6. A copy of the information transmitted to the vehicle owner.

6.5.7. A brief description of the system which the manufacturer uses to assure an adequate supply of component or sys-
tems for fulfilling the remedial action. It shall be indicated when there will be an adequate supply of components
or systems to initiate the campaign.

6.5.8. A copy of all instructions to be sent to those persons who are to perform the repair.

6.5.9. A description of the impact of the proposed remedial measures on the emissions, fuel consumption, driveability,
and safety of each vehicle type, covered by the plan of remedial measures with data and technical studies which
support these conclusions.

6.5.10. Any other information, reports or data the type-approval authority may reasonably determine is necessary to evalu-

ate the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.11. Where the plan of remedial measures includes a recall, a description of the method for recording the repair shall be

submitted to the type-approval authority. If a label is used, an example of it shall be submitted.

6.6.

6.7.

6.8.

The manufacturer may be required to conduct reasonably designed and necessary tests on components and vehicles
incorporating a proposed change, repair, or modification to demonstrate the effectiveness of the change, repair, or
modification.

The manufacturer is responsible for keeping a record of every vehicle recalled and repaired and the workshop which
performed the repair. The type-approval authority shall have access to the record on request for a period of 5 years
from the implementation of the plan of remedial measures.

The repair and modification or addition of new equipment shall be recorded in a certificate supplied by the manu-
facturer to the vehicle owner.

L 199/64

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 2

STATISTICAL PROCEDURE FOR IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY TESTING

1. This procedure shall be used to verify the in-service conformity requirements for the type 1 test. The applicable statis-
tical method set out in Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall apply, with the exceptions described in the sec-
tions 2 to 9.

2. Footnote 1 shall not apply.

3. Paragraphs 3.2 shall be understood as follows:

A vehicle is said to be an outlying emitter when the conditions given in paragraph 3.2.2 are met.

4. Paragraph 3.2.1 shall not apply.

5.

6.

7.

In paragraph 3.2.2 the reference to row B of the table in paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to Table 1
of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles and to Table 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007’for Euro 6 vehicles.

In paragraphs 3.2.3.2.1 and 3.2.4.2 the reference to paragraph 6 of Appendix 3 shall be understood as reference to Sec-
tion 6 of Appendix 1 to Annex II to this Regulation.

In footnotes 2 and 3 the reference to row A of the table in paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to Table
1 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles and to Table 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

8.

In paragraph 4.2. the reference to paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as reference to Table 1 of Annex I to Regula-
tion (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles and Table 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

9. Figure 4/1 shall be replaced by the following figure:

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/65

In-service conformity checking — audit procedure

L 199/66

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 3

RESPONSIBILITIES FOR IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY

1. The process of checking in-service conformity check is illustrated in Figure 1

2. The manufacturer shall compile all the information needed to comply with the requirements of this Annex. The approval

authority may also take information from surveillance programmes into consideration.

3. The approval authority shall conduct all the procedures and tests necessary to ensure that the requirements regarding

the in-service conformity are met. (Phases 2 to 4).

4.

In the event of discrepancies or disagreements in the assessment of information supplied, the approval authority shall
request clarification from the technical service that conducted the type-approval test.

5. The manufacturer shall establish and implement a plan of remedial measures. This plan shall be approved by the approval

authority before it is implemented (Phase 5).

Figure 1

Illustration of the in-service conformity process

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/67

ANNEX III

VERIFYING AVERAGE EXHAUST EMISSIONS AT AMBIENT CONDITIONS

(TYPE 1 TEST)

1.

INTRODUCTION

This Annex describes the procedure for the type 1 test verifying the average exhaust emissions at ambient
conditions.

2.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.

2.2.

2.3.

2.4.

2.5.

The general requirements shall be those set out in paragraph 5.3.1 of UN/ECE Regulation 83, with the exceptions
described in sections 2.2 to 2.5.

The vehicles that are subject to the test set out in paragraph 5.3.1.1 shall be understood as being all vehicles cov-
ered by the scope of this Regulation.

The pollutants specified in paragraph 5.3.1.2.4 shall be understood as being all those covered by Tables 1 and 2 of
Annex 1 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

The reference to the deterioration factors from paragraph 5.3.6 in paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as being
a reference to the deterioration factors specified in Annex VII to this Regulation.

The emission limits referred to in paragraph 5.3.1.4 shall be understood as being a reference to the emission limits
set out in Table 1 of Annex 1 to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles, and in Table 2 of Annex 1 of
Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

2.6.

Requirements for vehicles fuelled by LPG, natural gas or biomethane

2.6.1.

The general requirements for testing vehicles fuelled by LPG, natural gas or biomethane shall be those set out in
section 1 of Annex 12 to UN/ECE Regulation 83.

3.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.

3.2.

The technical requirements shall be those set out in Annex 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set
out in sections 3.2 to 3.12.

The reference fuels specified in paragraph 3.2 shall be understood as being a reference to the appropriate reference
fuel specifications in Annex IX to this Regulation.

3.3.

The pollutant gases mentioned in paragraph 4.3.1.1 shall be understood as including methane:

‘… (HFID). It shall be calibrated with propane gas expressed as equivalent to carbon atoms (C1).

Methane (CH4) analysis:

The analyser shall be either a gas chromatograph combined with a flame ionisation (FID) type or a flame ionisation
(FID) with a non-methane cutter type, calibrated with methane gas expressed equivalent to carbon atoms (C1).

Nitrogen oxide (NOx) …’

L 199/68

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.4.

The hydrocarbons ratios in paragraph 8.2 shall be understood as follows:

For petrol (C1H1,89O0,016)

For diesel (C1H1,86O0,005)

For LPG (C1H2,525)

For NG/biomethane (CH4)

For ethanol (E85) (C1H2,74O0,385)

d = 0,631 g/l

d = 0,622 g/l

d = 0,649 g/l

d = 0,714 g/l

d = 0,932 g/l

3.5.

From the relevant dates set out in Article 10(4) and 10(5) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, paragraph 4.1.2. of
Appendix 3 to Annex 4 shall be understood as follows:

‘Tyres

The choice of tyres shall be based on the rolling resistance. The tyres with the highest rolling resistance shall be
chosen, measured according to ISO 28580.

If there are more than three tyre rolling resistances, the tyre with the second highest rolling resistance shall be
chosen.

The rolling resistance characteristics of the tyres fitted to production vehicles shall reflect those of the tyres used
for type-approval’

3.6.

Paragraph 2.2.2 of Appendix 5 to Annex 4 shall be understood as covering:

‘… concentrations of CO2, CO, THC, CH4 and NOx …’

3.7.

Paragraph 1 of Appendix 8 to Annex 4 shall be amended to read:

‘… There is no humidity correction for THC, CH4 and CO, …’

3.8.

The second subparagraph of paragraph 1.3 of Appendix 8 to Annex 4 shall be understood as:

‘… The dilution factor is calculated as follows:

For each reference fuel:

DF =

X

CCO2 + (CHC+CCO)10

–4

For a fuel of composition CxHyOz the general formula is:

X = 100

x

x+

y

2

+ 3,76(x+

y

2

–

z

2)

For the reference fuels contained Annex IX, the values of “X” are as follows.

Fuel

Petrol (E5)

Diesel (B5)

LPG

NG/biomethane

Ethanol (E85)

X

13,4

13,5

11,9

9,5

12,5’

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/69

3.9.

An addition to the requirements of Paragraph 1.3. of Appendix 8 to Annex 4, the following requirements shall
apply:

Non-methane hydrocarbon concentration is calculated as follows:

CNMHC = CTHC — (Rf CH4 × CCH4)

where:

CNMHC
CTHC

CCH4

Rf CH4

= corrected concentration of NMHC in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent,
= concentration of THC in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent and corrected

by the amount of THC contained in the dilution air,

= concentration of CH4 in the diluted exhaust gas, expressed in ppm carbon equivalent and corrected

by the amount of CH4 contained in the dilution air,

= is the FID response factor to methane as defined in paragraph 2.3 of Annex 4-Appendix 6.

3.10.

Paragraph 1.5.2.3 of Appendix 8 to Annex 4 shall be understood as including the following:

QTHC = 0,932

in the case of ethanol (E85)

3.11.

References to HC should be understood as references to THC in the following paragraphs:

(a)

Paragraph 4.3.1.1;

(b)

Paragraph 4.3.2;

(c) Appendix 6 — Paragraph 2.2;

(d) Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.3;

(e) Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.5.1.3;

(f) Appendix 8 — Paragraph 1.5.2.3;

(g) Appendix 8 — Paragraph 2.1.

3.12.

References to hydrocarbons should be understood as references to total hydrocarbons in the following paragraphs:

(a)

Paragraph 4.3.1.1;

(b)

Paragraph 4.3.2;

(c)

Paragraph 7.2.8.

3.13.

Technical requirements for a vehicle equipped with a periodically regenerating system

3.13.1. The technical requirements shall be those set out in section 3 of Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the

exceptions described in sections 3.13.2 to 3.13.4.

3.13.2. The reference to Annex 1, items 4.2.11.2.1.10.1 to 4.2.11.2.1.10.4 or 4.2.11.2.5.4.1 to 4.2.11.2.5.4.4 in sec-
tion 3.1.3 shall be understood as references to items 3.2.12.2.1.11.1 to 3.2.12.2.1.11.4 or 3.2.12.2.6.4.1
to 3.2.12.2.6.4.4 of Appendix 3 to Annex I of Regulation (EC) No 692/2008.

3.13.3. At the request of the manufacturer, the test procedure specific to periodically regenerating systems shall not apply
to a regenerative device if the manufacturer provides data to the approval authority that, during cycles where regen-
eration occurs, emissions remain below the standards given in Table 1 or 2 of Annex I to Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007 applied for the concerned vehicle category after agreement of the technical service.

3.13.4. For a periodically regenerating device, during cycles where regeneration occurs, emission standards can be exceeded.
If a regeneration of a pollution control device occurs at least once per type 1 test and the device has already regen-
erated at least once during vehicle preparation cycle, it shall be considered as a continuously regenerating system
which does not require a special test procedure.

L 199/70

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

EMISSIONS DATA REQUIRED AT TYPE-APPROVAL FOR ROADWORTHINESS PURPOSES

ANNEX IV

Appendix 1

MEASURING CARBON MONOXIDE EMISSION AT IDLING SPEEDS

(TYPE 2 TEST)

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1. This appendix describes the procedure for the type 2 test, measuring carbon monoxide emissions at idling speeds (nor-

mal and high).

2.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1. The general requirements shall be those specified in paragraphs 5.3.7.1 to 5.3.7.4 of UN/ECE Regulation 83, with the

exceptions set out in sections 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4.

2.2. The atomic ratios specified in section 5.3.7.3 shall be understood as follows:

Hcv = Atomic ratio of hydrogen to carbon

— for petrol (E5) 1,89

— for LPG 2,53

— for NG/biomethane 4,0

— for ethanol (E85) 2,74

Ocv = Atomic ratio of oxygen to carbon

— for petrol (E5) 0 016

— for LPG 0,0

— for NG/biomethane 0,0

— for ethanol (E85) 0,39

2.3. The table in section 2.2 of Appendix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation shall be completed on the basis of the require-

ments set out in sections 2.2 and 2.4 of this Annex.

2.4. The manufacturer shall confirm the accuracy of the Lambda value recorded at the time of type-approval in para-
graph 2.1 of this Appendix as being representative of typical production vehicles within 24 months of the date of the
granting of type-approval by the technical service. An assessment shall be made on the basis of surveys and studies of
production vehicles.

3.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1. The technical requirements shall be those set out in Annex 5 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set out

in section 3.2.

3.2. The reference fuels specified in paragraph 2.1 of Annex 5 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as refer-

ring to the appropriate reference fuel specifications in Annex IX to this Regulation.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/71

Appendix 2

MEASUREMENT OF SMOKE OPACITY

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1.

This Appendix describes the requirements for measuring the opacity of exhaust emissions.

2.

SYMBOL OF THE CORRECTED ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT

2.1.

2.2.

A symbol of the corrected absorption coefficient shall be affixed to every vehicle conforming to a vehicle type to
which this test applies. The symbol shall be a rectangle surrounding a figure expressing in m–1 the corrected absorp-
tion coefficient obtained, at the time of approval, from the test under free acceleration. The test method is described
in section 4.

The symbol shall be clearly legible and indelible. It shall be fixed in a conspicuous and readily accessible place, the
location of which shall be specified in the Addendum to the type-approval certificate shown in Appendix 4 to
Annex I.

2.3.

Figure IV.2.1 gives an example of the symbol.

Figure IV.2.1

The above symbol shows that the corrected absorption coefficient is 1,30 m–1.

3.

SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS

3.1.

3.2.

The specifications and tests shall be those set out in Part III, section 24, of UN/ECE Regulation No 24, with the excep-
tion to these procedures set out in section 3.2.

The reference to Annex 2 in paragraph 24.1 of UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood as a reference to
Appendix 2 to Annex X to this Regulation.

4.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1.

The technical requirements shall be those set out in Annexes 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 and 10 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24, with
the exceptions set out in sections 4.2., 4.3 and 4.4.

4.2.

Test at steady speeds over the full load curve

4.2.1. The references to Annex 1 in paragraph 3.1. of Annex 4 of UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood as ref-

erences to Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation.

4.2.2. The reference fuel specified in paragraph 3.2 of Annex 4 of UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood as ref-
erence to the reference fuel in Annex IX to this Regulation appropriate to the emission limits against which the
vehicle is being type approved.

L 199/72

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

4.3.

Test under free acceleration

4.3.1. The references to Table 2, Annex 2 in paragraph 2.2 of Annex 5 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be understood

as references to the table under point 2.4.2.1 of Appendix 4 to Annex I to this Regulation.

4.3.2. The references to paragraph 7.3 of Annex 1 in paragraph 2.3 of Annex 5 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 shall be

understood as references to Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation.

4.4.

‘ECE’ method of measuring the net power of C.I. engines

4.4.1. The references in paragraph 7 of Annex 10 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 to the ‘Appendix to this Annex’ and in
paragraphs 7 and 8 of Annex 10 to UN/ECE Regulation No 24 to ‘Annex 1’ shall be understood as references to
Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/73

ANNEX V

VERIFYING EMISSIONS OF CRANKCASE GASES

(TYPE 3 TEST)

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1. This Annex describes the procedure for the type 3 test verifying emissions of crankcase gases.

2.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1. The general requirements for conducting the type 3 test shall be those set out in section 2 of Annex 6 to UN/ECE Regu-

lation No 83.

3.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1. The technical requirements shall be those set out in section 3 to 6 of Annex 6 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83.

L 199/74

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

ANNEX VI

DETERMINATION OF EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS

(TYPE 4 TEST)

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1. This Annex describes the procedure for the Type 4 test, which determines the emission of hydrocarbons by evapora-

tion from the fuel systems of vehicles.

2.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1. The technical requirements and specifications shall be those set out in sections 2 to 7 and Appendices 1 and 2 to

Annex 7 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set out in sections 2.2 and 2.3.

2.2. The reference fuels specified in paragraph 3.2 of Annex 7 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as refer-

ence to the appropriate reference fuel specifications in Annex IX to this Regulation.

2.3. The reference to paragraph 8.2.5 in paragraph 7.5.2 of Annex 7 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be understood as

reference to Section 4 of Annex I to this Regulation.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/75

ANNEX VII

VERIFYING THE DURABILITY OF POLLUTION CONTROL DEVICES

(TYPE 5 TEST)

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1.

1.2.

This Annex describes the tests for verifying the durability of pollution control devices. The durability requirements
shall be demonstrated using one of the three options set out in points 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4.

The whole vehicle durability test represents an ageing test of 160 000 kilometres driven on a test track, on the road,
or on a chassis dynamometer.

1.3.

The manufacturer may choose to use a bench ageing durability test.

1.4.

As an alternative to durability testing, a manufacturer may choose to apply the assigned deterioration factors from
the following table.

Engine Category

Positive-ignition

Compression-ignition (Euro 5)

Compression-ignition (Euro 6) (1)

(1) Euro 6 deterioration factors to be determined

Assigned deterioration factors

CO

1,5

1,5

THC

NMHC

NOx

HC + NOx

1,3

—

1,3

—

1,6

1,1

—

1,1

PM

1,0

1,0

P

1,0

1,0

1.5.

1.6.

1.7.

At the request of the manufacturer, the technical service may carry out the type 1 test before the whole vehicle or
bench ageing durability test has been completed using the assigned deterioration factors in the table above. On
completion of the whole vehicle or bench ageing durability test, the technical service may then amend the type-
approval results recorded in Appendix 4 to Annex I by replacing the assigned deterioration factors in the above
table with those measured in the whole vehicle or bench ageing durability test.

In the absence of assigned deterioration factors for Euro 6 compression ignition vehicles, manufacturers shall use
the whole vehicle or bench ageing durability test procedures to establish deterioration factors.

Deterioration factors are determined using either the procedures set out in points 1.2 and 1.3 or using the assigned
values in the table contained in point 1.4. The deterioration factors are used to establish compliance with the
requirements of the appropriate emissions limits set out in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex 1 to Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007 during the useful life of the vehicle.

2.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.

The technical requirements and specifications shall be those set out in section 2 to 6 of Annex 9 to UN/ECE Regu-
lation No 83, with the exceptions set out in subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.4.

2.1.1.

As an alternative to the operating cycle described in paragraph 5.1. of Annex 9 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 for
the whole vehicle durability test, the vehicle manufacturer may use Standard Road Cycle (SRC) described in Appen-
dix 3 of this Annex. This test cycle shall be conducted until the vehicle has covered a minimum of 160 000 km.

L 199/76

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

2.1.2.

In paragraph 5.3 and paragraph 6 of Annex 9 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 the reference to 80 000 km shall be
understood as reference to 160 000 km.

2.1.3.

The reference to paragraph 5.3.1.4. in the first section of paragraph 6 of Annex 9 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83
shall be understood as reference to Table 1 of Annex I of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles
and Table 2 of Annex I of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

2.1.4.

In Section 6 of Annex 9 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83, the sixth subparagraph shall be understood as follows:

A multiplicative exhaust emission deterioration factor shall be calculated for each pollutant as follows:

D . E . F . =

Mi2
Mi1

At the request of a manufacturer, an additive exhaust emission deterioration factor shall be calculated for each pol-
lutant as follows:

D . E . F . = Mi2 – Mi1

2.2.

Bench Ageing Durability Test

2.2.1.

In addition to the technical requirements for the bench ageing test set out in section 1.3, the technical require-
ments set out in this section shall apply.

The fuel to be used during the test shall be the one specified in paragraph 3 of Annex 9 of Regulation 83.

2.3.1.

Vehicles with Positive Ignition Engines

2.3.1.1. The following bench ageing procedure shall be applicable for positive-ignition vehicles including hybrid vehicles

which use a catalyst as the principle after-treatment emission control device.

The bench ageing procedure requires the installation of the catalyst-plus-oxygen sensor system on a catalyst age-
ing bench.

Ageing on the bench shall be conducted by following the standard bench cycle (SBC) for the period of time cal-
culated from the bench ageing time (BAT) equation. The BAT equation requires, as input, catalyst time-at-
temperature data measured on the Standard Road Cycle (SRC), described in Appendix 3 to this Annex.

2.3.1.2. Standard bench cycle (SBC). Standard catalyst bench ageing shall be conducted following the SBC. The SBC shall
be run for the period of time calculated from the BAT equation. The SBC is described in Appendix 1 of this Annex.

2.3.1.3. Catalyst time-at-temperature data. Catalyst temperature shall be measured during at least two full cycles of the SRC

cycle as described in Appendix 3 to this Annex.

Catalyst temperature shall be measured at the highest temperature location in the hottest catalyst on the test
vehicle. Alternatively, the temperature may be measured at another location providing that it is adjusted to rep-
resent the temperature measured at the hottest location using good engineering judgement.

Catalyst temperature shall be measured at a minimum rate of one hertz (one measurement per second).

The measured catalyst temperature results shall be tabulated into a histogram with temperature groups of no larger
than 25 °C.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/77

2.3.1.4. Bench-ageing time. Bench ageing time shall be calculated using the bench ageing time (BAT) equation as follows:

te for a temperature bin = th e((R/Tr)–(R/Tv))

Total te = Sum of te over all the temperature groups

Bench-Ageing Time = A (Total te)

Where:

A

R

th

Total te

te for a bin

Tr

Tv

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

1,1 This value adjusts the catalyst ageing time to account for deterioration from sources
other than thermal ageing of the catalyst.

Catalyst thermal reactivity = 17 500

The time (in hours) measured within the prescribed temperature bin of the vehicle’s catalyst
temperature histogram adjusted to a full useful life basis e.g., if the histogram represented
400 km, and useful life is 160 000 km; all histogram time entries would be multiplied by
400 (160 000/400).

The equivalent time (in hours) to age the catalyst at the temperature of Tr on the catalyst
ageing bench using the catalyst ageing cycle to produce the same amount of deterioration
experienced by the catalyst due to thermal deactivation over the 160 000 km.

The equivalent time (in hours) to age the catalyst at the temperature of Tr on the catalyst
ageing bench using the catalyst ageing cycle to produce the same amount of deterioration
experienced by the catalyst due to thermal deactivation at the temperature bin of Tv over
160 000 km.

The effective reference temperature (in °K) of the catalyst on the catalyst bench run on the
bench ageing cycle. The effective temperature is the constant temperature that would result
in the same amount of ageing as the various temperatures experienced during the bench age-
ing cycle.

The mid-point temperature (in °K) of the temperature bin of the vehicle on-road catalyst tem-
perature histogram.

2.3.1.5. Effective reference temperature on the SBC. The effective reference temperature of the standard bench cycle (SBC)
shall be determined for the actual catalyst system design and actual ageing bench which will be used using the fol-
lowing procedures:

(a) Measure time-at-temperature data in the catalyst system on the catalyst ageing bench following the SBC. Cata-
lyst temperature shall be measured at the highest temperature location of the hottest catalyst in the system.
Alternatively, the temperature may be measured at another location providing that it is adjusted to represent
the temperature measured at the hottest location.

Catalyst temperature shall be measured at a minimum rate of one hertz (one measurement per second) dur-
ing at least 20 minutes of bench ageing. The measured catalyst temperature results shall be tabulated into a
histogram with temperature groups of no larger than 10 °C.

(b) The BAT equation shall be used to calculate the effective reference temperature by iterative changes to the
reference temperature (Tr) until the calculated ageing time equals or exceeds the actual time represented in
the catalyst temperature histogram. The resulting temperature is the effective reference temperature on the
SBC for that catalyst system and ageing bench.

2.3.1.6. Catalyst Ageing Bench. The catalyst ageing bench shall follow the SBC and deliver the appropriate exhaust flow,

exhaust constituents, and exhaust temperature at the face of the catalyst.

All bench ageing equipment and procedures shall record appropriate information (such as measured A/F ratios and
time-at-temperature in the catalyst) to assure that sufficient ageing has actually occurred.

L 199/78

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

2.3.1.7. Required Testing. For calculating deterioration factors at least two Type 1 tests before bench ageing of the emis-
sion control hardware and at least two Type 1 tests after the bench-aged emission hardware is reinstalled have to
be performed on the test vehicle.

Additional testing may be conducted by the manufacturer. Calculation of the deterioration factors has to be done
according to the calculation method as specified in Paragraph 6 of Annex 9 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 as
amended by this Regulation.

2.3.2.

Vehicles with Compression Ignition Engines

2.3.2.1. The following bench ageing procedure is applicable for compression-ignition vehicles including hybrid vehicles.

The bench ageing procedure requires the installation of the aftertreatment system on a aftertreatment system age-
ing bench.

Ageing on the bench is conducted by following the standard diesel bench cycle (SDBC) for the number of
regenerations/desulphurisations calculated from the bench ageing duration (BAD) equation.

2.3.2.2. Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC). Standard bench ageing is conducted following the SDBC. The SDBC shall be
run for the period of time calculated from the bench ageing duration (BAD) equation. The SDBC is described in
Appendix 2 of this Annex.

2.3.2.3. Regeneration data. Regeneration intervals shall be measured during at least 10 full cycles of the SRC cycle as

described in Appendix 3. As an alternative the intervals from the Ki determination may be used.

If applicable, desulphurisation intervals shall also be considered based on manufacturer’s data

2.3.2.4. Diesel bench-ageing duration. Bench ageing duration is calculated using the BAD equation as follows:

Bench-Ageing Duration = number of regeneration and/or desulphurisation cycles (whichever is the longer) equiva-
lent to 160 000 km of driving

2.3.2.5. Ageing Bench. The ageing bench shall follow the SDBC and deliver appropriate exhaust flow, exhaust constitu-

ents, and exhaust temperature to the aftertreatment system inlet.

The manufacturer shall record the number of regenerations/desulphurisations (if applicable) to assure that suffi-
cient ageing has actually occurred.

2.3.2.6. Required Testing. For calculating deterioration factors at least two Type 1 tests before bench ageing of the emis-
sion control hardware and at least two Type 1 tests after the bench-aged emission hardware is reinstalled have to
be performed. Additional testing may be conducted by the manufacturer. Calculation of the deterioration factors
shall be done according to the calculation method set out in Paragraph 6 of Annex 9 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83
and with the additional requirements contained in this Regulation.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/79

Appendix 1

Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)

1.

Introduction

The standard ageing durability procedure consists of ageing a catalyst/oxygen sensor system on an ageing bench
which follows the standard bench cycle (SBC) described in this Appendix. The SBC requires use of an ageing bench
with an engine as the source of feed gas for the catalyst. The SBC is a 60-second cycle which is repeated as necessary
on the ageing bench to conduct ageing for the required period of time. The SBC is defined based on the catalyst tem-
perature, engine air/fuel (A/F) ratio, and the amount of secondary air injection which is added in front of the first
catalyst.

2.

Catalyst Temperature Control

2.1.

2.2.

Catalyst temperature shall be measured in the catalyst bed at the location where the highest temperature occurs in
the hottest catalyst. Alternatively, the feed gas temperature may be measured and converted to catalyst bed tempera-
ture using a linear transform calculated from correlation data collected on the catalyst design and ageing bench to be
used in the ageing process.

Control the catalyst temperature at stoichiometric operation (01 to 40 seconds on the cycle) to a minimum of 800 °C
(± 10 °C) by selecting the appropriate engine speed, load, and spark timing for the engine. Control the maximum
catalyst temperature that occurs during the cycle to 890 °C (± 10 °C) by selecting the appropriate A/F ratio of the
engine during the ‘rich’ phase described in the table below.

2.3.

If a low control temperature other than 800 °C is utilized, the high control temperature shall be 90 °C higher than
the low control temperature.

Standard Bench Cycle (SBC)

Time
(seconds)

1-40

41-45

46-55

56-60

Engine Air/Fuel Ratio

Secondary Air Injection

Stoichiometric with load, spark timing and engine speed con-
trolled to achieve a minimum catalyst temperature of 800 °C

‘Rich’ (A/F ratio selected to achieve a maximum catalyst tempera-
ture over the entire cycle of 890 °C or 90 °C higher than lower
control temperature)

None

None

‘Rich’ (A/F ratio selected to achieve a maximum catalyst tempera-
ture over the entire cycle of 890 °C or 90 °C higher than lower
control temperature)

3 % (± 1 %)

Stoichiometric with load, spark timing and engine speed con-
trolled to achieve a minimum catalyst temperature of 800 °C

3 % (± 1 %)

L 199/80

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.

Ageing Bench Equipment and Procedures

3.1.

Ageing Bench Configuration. The ageing bench shall provide the appropriate exhaust flow rate, temperature, air-fuel
ratio, exhaust constituents and secondary air injection at the inlet face of the catalyst.

The standard ageing bench consists of an engine, engine controller, and engine dynamometer. Other configurations
may be acceptable (e.g. whole vehicle on a dynamometer, or a burner that provides the correct exhaust conditions),
as long as the catalyst inlet conditions and control features specified in this Appendix are met.

A single ageing bench may have the exhaust flow split into several streams providing that each exhaust stream meets
the requirements of this appendix. If the bench has more than one exhaust stream, multiple catalyst systems may be
aged simultaneously.

3.2.

Exhaust System Installation. The entire catalyst(s)-plus-oxygen sensor(s) system, together with all exhaust piping
which connects these components, will be installed on the bench. For engines with multiple exhaust streams (such
as some V6 and V8 engines), each bank of the exhaust system will be installed separately on the bench in parallel.

For exhaust systems that contain multiple in-line catalysts, the entire catalyst system including all catalysts, all oxy-
gen sensors and the associated exhaust piping will be installed as a unit for ageing. Alternatively, each individual cata-
lyst may be separately aged for the appropriate period of time.

3.3.

3.4.

3.5.

Temperature Measurement. Catalyst temperature shall be measured using a thermocouple placed in the catalyst bed
at the location where the highest temperature occurs in the hottest catalyst. Alternatively, the feed gas temperature
just before the catalyst inlet face may be measured and converted to catalyst bed temperature using a linear trans-
form calculated from correlation data collected on the catalyst design and ageing bench to be used in the ageing pro-
cess. The catalyst temperature shall be stored digitally at the speed of 1 hertz (one measurement per second).

Air/Fuel Measurement. Provisions shall be made for the measurement of the air/fuel (A/F) ratio (such as a wide-range
oxygen sensor) as close as possible to the catalyst inlet and outlet flanges. The information from these sensors shall
be stored digitally at the speed of 1 hertz (one measurement per second).

Exhaust Flow Balance. Provisions shall be made to assure that the proper amount of exhaust (measured in
grams/second at stoichiometry, with a tolerance of ± 5 grams/second) flows through each catalyst system that is
being aged on the bench.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/81

The proper flow rate is determined based upon the exhaust flow that would occur in the original vehicle’s engine at
the steady state engine speed and load selected for the bench ageing in Paragraph 3.6. of this Appendix.

3.6.

Setup. The engine speed, load, and spark timing are selected to achieve a catalyst bed temperature of 800 °C (± 10 °C)
at steady-state stoichiometric operation.

The air injection system is set to provide the necessary air flow to produce 3,0 % oxygen (± 0,1 %) in the steady-state
stoichiometric exhaust stream just in front of the first catalyst. A typical reading at the upstream A/F measurement
point (required in paragraph 5) is lambda 1,16 (which is approximately 3 % oxygen).

With the air injection on, set the ‘Rich’ A/F ratio to produce a catalyst bed temperature of 890 °C (± 10 °C). A typical
A/F value for this step is lambda 0,94 (approximately 2 % CO).

3.7.

Ageing Cycle. The standard bench ageing procedures use the standard bench cycle (SBC). The SBC is repeated until
the amount of ageing calculated from the bench ageing time equation (BAT) is achieved.

3.8.

Quality Assurance. The temperatures and A/F ratio in paragraphs 3.3. and 3.4. of this appendix shall be reviewed
periodically (at least every 50 hours) during ageing. Necessary adjustments shall be made to assure that the SBC is
being appropriately followed throughout the ageing process.

After the ageing has been completed, the catalyst time-at-temperature collected during the ageing process shall be
tabulated into a histogram with temperature groups of no larger than 10 °C. The BAT equation and the calculated
effective reference temperature for the ageing cycle according to Paragraph 2.3.1.4 of Annex VII will be used to deter-
mine if the appropriate amount of thermal ageing of the catalyst has in fact occurred. Bench ageing will be extended
if the thermal effect of the calculated ageing time is not at least 95 % of the target thermal ageing.

3.9.

Startup and Shutdown. Care should be taken to assure that the maximum catalyst temperature for rapid deteriora-
tion (e.g., 1 050 °C) does not occur during startup or shutdown. Special low temperature startup and shutdown pro-
cedures may be used to alleviate this concern.

4.

Experimentally Determining the R-Factor for Bench Ageing Durability Procedures

4.1.

The R-Factor is the catalyst thermal reactivity coefficient used in the bench ageing time (BAT) equation. Manufac-
turers may determine the value of R experimentally using the following procedures.

4.1.1. Using the applicable bench cycle and ageing bench hardware, age several catalysts (minimum of 3 of the same cata-
lyst design) at different control temperatures between the normal operating temperature and the damage limit tem-
perature. Measure emissions (or catalyst inefficiency (1-catalyst efficiency)) for each exhaust constituent. Assure that
the final testing yields data between one- and two-times the emission standard.

4.1.2. Estimate the value of R and calculate the effective reference temperature (Tr) for the bench ageing cycle for each con-

trol temperature according to Paragraph 2.4.4 of Annex VII.

4.1.3. Plot emissions (or catalyst inefficiency) versus ageing time for each catalyst. Calculate the least-squared best-fit line
through the data. For the data set to be useful for this purpose the data should have an approximately common inter-
cept between 0 and 6 400 km. See the following graph for an example.

4.1.4. Calculate the slope of the best-fit line for each ageing temperature.

L 199/82

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

4.1.5. Plot the natural log (ln) of the slope of each best-fit line (determined in step 4.1.4.) along the vertical axis, versus the
inverse of ageing temperature (1/(ageing temperature, deg K)) along the horizontal axis, Calculate the least squared
best-fit lines through the data. The slope of the line is the R-factor. See the following graph for an example.

4.1.6. Compare the R-factor to the initial value that was used in Step 4.1.2. If the calculated R-factor differs from the initial
value by more than 5 %, choose a new R-factor that is between the initial and calculated values, and then repeat Steps
2-6 to derive a new R-factor. Repeat this process until the calculated R-factor is within 5 % of the initially assumed
R-factor.

4.1.7. Compare the R-factor determined separately for each exhaust constituent. Use the lowest R-factor (worst case) for

the BAT equation.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/83

Appendix 2

Standard Diesel Bench Cycle (SDBC)

1.

Introduction

For particulate filters, the number of regenerations is critical to the ageing process. For systems that require desulphu-
risation cycles (e.g. NOx storage catalysts), this process is also significant.

The standard diesel bench ageing durability procedure consists of ageing an aftertreatment system on an ageing bench
which follows the standard bench cycle (SDBC) described in this Appendix. The SDBC requires use of an ageing bench
with an engine as the source of feed gas for the system.

During the SDBC, the regeneration/desulphurisation strategies of the system shall remain in normal operating
condition.

2.

The Standard Diesel Bench Cycle reproduces the engine speed and load conditions that are encountered in the SRC
cycle as appropriate to the period for which durability is to be determined. In order to accelerate the process of ageing,
the engine settings on the test bench may be modified to reduce the system loading times. For example the fuel injec-
tion timing or EGR strategy may be modified.

3.

Ageing Bench Equipment and Procedures

3.1. The standard ageing bench consists of an engine, engine controller, and engine dynamometer. Other configurations
may be acceptable (e.g. whole vehicle on a dynamometer, or a burner that provides the correct exhaust conditions), as
long as the aftertreatment system inlet conditions and control features specified in this Appendix are met.

A single ageing bench may have the exhaust flow split into several streams providing that each exhaust stream meets
the requirements of this appendix. If the bench has more than one exhaust stream, multiple aftertreatment systems
may be aged simultaneously.

3.2. Exhaust System Installation. The entire aftertreatment system, together with all exhaust piping which connects these
components, will be installed on the bench. For engines with multiple exhaust streams (such as some V6 and V8
engines), each bank of the exhaust system will be installed separately on the bench.

The entire aftertreatment system will be installed as a unit for ageing. Alternatively, each individual component may
be separately aged for the appropriate period of time.

L 199/84

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 3

Standard Road Cycle (SRC)

Introduction

The standard road cycle (SRC) is a kilometre accumulation cycle. The vehicle may be run on a test track or on a kilometre
accumulation dynamometer.

The cycle consists of 7 laps of a 6 km course. The length of the lap may be changed to accommodate the length of the mile-
age accumulation test track.

Standard Road cycle

Lap

Description

Typical acceleration
rate m/s2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

(start engine) idle 10 seconds

Moderate acceleration to 48 km/h

Cruise at 48 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 32 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 48 km/h

Cruise at 48 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to stop

Idle 5 seconds

Moderate acceleration to 56 km/h

Cruise at 56 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 40 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 56 km/h

Cruise at 56 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to stop

idle 10 seconds

Moderate acceleration to 64 km/h

Cruise at 64 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 48 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 64 km/h

Cruise at 64 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to stop

Idle 5 seconds

Moderate acceleration to 72 km/h

Cruise at 72 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 56 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 72 km/h

Cruise at 72 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to stop

idle 10 seconds

Hard acceleration to 88 km/h

Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 72 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 88 km/h

0

1,79

0

– 2,23

1,79

0

– 2,23

0

1,79

0

– 2,23

1,79

0

– 2,23

0

1,34

0

– 2,23

1,34

0

– 2,23

0

1,34

0

– 2,23

1,34

0

– 2,23

0

1,79

0

– 2,23

0,89

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/85

Lap

Description

Typical acceleration
rate m/s2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

5

5

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 72 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 97 km/h

Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 97 km/h

Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to stop

idle 10 seconds

Hard acceleration to 129 km/h

Coastdown to 113 km/h

Cruise at 113 km/h for 1/2 lap

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 105 km/h

Cruise at 105 km/h for 1/2 lap

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 121 km/h

Cruise at 121 km/h for 1/2 lap

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

Light acceleration to 113 km/h

Cruise at 113 km/h for 1/2 lap

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 113 km/h

Coastdown to 97 km/h

Cruise at 97 km/h for 1/2 lap

Moderate deceleration to 80 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 104 km/h

Cruise at 104 km/h for 1/2 lap

Moderate deceleration to stop

idle 45 seconds

Hard acceleration to 88 km/h

Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 88 km/h

Cruise at 88 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 80 km/h

Cruise at 80 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to 64 km/h

Moderate acceleration to 80 km/h

Cruise at 80 km/h for 1/4 lap

Moderate deceleration to stop

0

– 2,23

0,89

0

– 2,23

0,89

0

– 1,79

0

1,34

– 0,45

0

– 1,34

0,89

0

– 1,34

0,45

0

– 1,34

0,45

0

– 1,34

0,89

– 0,45

0

– 1,79

0,45

0

– 1,79

0

1,79

0

– 2,23

0,89

0

– 2,23

0,89

0

– 2,23

0,89

0

– 2,23

L 199/86

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

The standard road cycle is represented graphically in the following figure:

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/87

ANNEX VIII

VERIFYING THE AVERAGE EMISSIONS AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES

(TYPE 6 TEST)

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1. This Annex describes the equipment required and the procedure for the Type 6 test in order to verify the emissions at

cold temperatures.

2.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1. The general requirements for the Type 6 test are those set out in paragraph 5.3.5.1.1 to 5.3.5.3.2 of UN/ECE Regu-

lation 83 with the exceptions specified below.

2.2. The reference to ‘hydrocarbons’ in 5.3.5.1.4 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be read as ‘total hydrocarbons’

2.3. The limit values referred to in section 5.3.5.2 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 relate to the limit values shown in Annex 1,

Table 3 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

3.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1. The technical requirements and specifications are those set out in section 2 to 6 of Annex 8 to UN/ECE Regulation

No 83 with the exceptions described in the following sections.

3.2. The reference to paragraph 3. of Annex 10 in paragraph 3.4.1. of Annex 8 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be under-

stood as reference to to Section B of Annex IX to this Regulation.

3.3. The references to ‘hydrocarbons’ shall be read as ‘total hydrocarbons’ in the following sections of Annex 8 to UN/ECE

Regulation No 83:

Paragraph 2.4.1

Paragraph 5.1.1

L 199/88

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

ANNEX IX

SPECIFICATIONS OF REFERENCE FUELS

A. REFERENCE FUELS

1. Technical data on fuels for testing vehicles with positive-ignition engines

Type: Petrol (E5)

Parameter

Unit

Limits (1)

Minimum

Maximum

Test method

Research octane number, RON

95,0

—

EN 25164

Motor octane number, MON

85,0

—

EN 25163

Density at 15 °C

kg/m3

743

756

EN ISO 3675

prEN ISO 5163

prEN ISO 5164

Vapour pressure

Water content

Distillation:

— Evaporated at 70 °C,

— evaporated at 100 °C,

— evaporated at150 °C,

— final boiling point,

Residue

Hydrocarbon analysis:

— olefins,

— aromatics,

— benzene,

— saturates,

Carbon/hydrogen ratio

Carbon/oxygen ratio

Induction period (2)

Oxygen content (3)

Existent gum

Sulphur content (4)

Copper corrosion

Lead content

kPa

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

°C

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

EN ISO 12185

56,0

60,0

EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE)

0,015

ASTM E 1064

24,0

48,0

82,0

190

—

3,0

29,0

—

44,0

60,0

90,0

EN-ISO 3405

EN-ISO 3405

EN-ISO 3405

210

EN-ISO 3405

2,0

EN-ISO 3405

13,0

35,0

1,0

ASTM D 1319

ASTM D 1319

EN 12177

ASTM 1319

Report

Report

Report

minutes

480

—

EN-ISO 7536

% m/m

mg/ml

mg/kg

mg/l

Report

EN 1601

—

—

—

—

0,04

EN-ISO 6246

10

EN ISO 20846

EN ISO 20884

Class 1

EN-ISO 2160

5

EN 237

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/89

Parameter

Phosphorus content (5)

Ethanol (3)

Unit

mg/l

% v/v

Limits (1)

Minimum

Maximum

—

4,7

1,3

5,3

Test method

ASTM D 3231

EN 1601

EN 13132

(1) The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259 Petroleum
products — Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test have been applied and in fixing a
minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value,
the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the
manufacturer of fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in
the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements
of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.

(2) The fuel may contain oxidation inhibitors and metal deactivators normally used to stabilise refinery gasoline streams, but

detergent/dispersive additives and solvent oils shall not be added.

(3) Ethanol meeting the specification of EN 15376 is the only oxygenate that shall be intentionally added to the reference fuel.
(4) The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the Type 1 test shall be reported.
(5) There shall be no intentional addition of compounds containing phosphorus, iron, manganese, or lead to this reference fuel.

Type: Ethanol (E85)

Parameter

Unit

Limits (1)

Minimum

Maximum

Test method (2)

Research octane number, RON

Motor octane number, MON

Density at 15 °C

Vapour pressure

Sulphur content (3) (4)

Oxidation stability

kg/m3

kPa

mg/kg

minutes

Existent gum content (solvent washed)

mg/100ml

95

85

40

—

360

—

—

—

EN ISO 5164

EN ISO 5163

Report

ISO 3675

60

10

EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE)

EN ISO 20846 EN ISO
20884

EN ISO 7536

5

EN-ISO 6246

Appearance This shall be determined at
ambient temperature or 15 °C whichever
is higher.

Clear and bright, visibly
free of suspended or pre-
cipitated contaminants

Visual inspection

Ethanol and higher alcohols (7)

% (V/V)

83

85

EN 1601

Higher alcohols (C3-C8)

Methanol

Petrol (5)

Phosphorus

Water content

Inorganic chloride content

pHe

% (V/V)

% (V/V)

% (V/V)

mg/l

% (V/V)

mg/l

—

2

0,5

Balance

0,3 (6)

0,3

1

9

6,5

Copper strip corrosion (3h at 50 °C)

Rating

Class 1

EN 13132

EN 14517

EN 228

ASTM D 3231

ASTM E 1064

ISO 6227

ASTM D 6423

EN ISO 2160

Acidity, (as acetic acid CH3COOH)

% (m/m)
(mg/l)

—

0,005-40 ASTM D 1613

L 199/90

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Parameter

Unit

Limits (1)

Minimum

Maximum

Test method (2)

Carbon/hydrogen ratio

Carbon/oxygen ration

report

report

(1) The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259 Petroleum
products — Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test have been applied and in fixing a
minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value,
the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the
manufacturer of fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in
the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements
of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.
In cases of dispute, the procedures for resolving the dispute and interpretation of the results based on test method precision,
described in EN ISO 4259 shall be used.
In cases of national dispute concerning sulphur content, either EN ISO 20846 or EN ISO 20884 shall be called up similar to the
reference in the national annex of EN 228.

(2)

(3)

(4) The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the Type 1 test shall be reported.
(5) The unleaded petrol content can be determined as 100 minus the sum of the percentage content of water and alcohols
(6) There shall be no intentional addition of compounds containing phosphorus, iron, manganese, or lead to this reference fuel.
(7) Ethanol to meet specification of EN 15376 is the only oxygenate that shall be intentionally added to this reference fuel.

Type: LPG

Parameter

Unit

Fuel A

Fuel B

Test method

Composition:

C3-content
C4-content
< C3, > C4
Olefins

Evaporation residue

Water at 0 °C

Total sulphur content

Hydrogen sulphide

Copper strip corrosion

Odour

Motor octane number

ISO 7941

% vol

% vol

% vol

% vol

30 ± 2

Balance

85 ± 2

Balance

Maximum 2

Maximum 2

Maximum 12

Maximum 15

mg/kg

Maximum 50

Maximum 50

prEN 15470

Free

Free

prEN 15469

mg/kg

Maximum 10

Maximum 10

ASTM 6667

Rating

None

Class 1

None

Class 1

ISO 8819

ISO 6251 (1)

Characteristic

Characteristic

Minimum 89

Minimum 89

EN 589 Annex B

(1) This method may not accurately determine the presence of corrosive materials if the sample contains corrosion inhibitors or other
chemicals which diminish the corrosivity of the sample to the copper strip. Therefore, the addition of such compounds for the
sole purpose of biasing the test method is prohibited.

Type: NG/Biomethane

Characteristics

Units

Basis

Test method

minimum

maximum

Limits

Reference fuel G20

Composition:

Methane

Balance (1)

N2
Sulphur content

Wobbe Index (net)

Reference fuel G25

Composition:

Methane

% mole

% mole

% mole
mg/m3 (2)
MJ/m3 (3)

100

—

—

48,2

99

—

—

47,2

ISO 6974

ISO 6974

ISO 6974

ISO 6326-5

100

1

10

49,2

% mole

86

84

88

ISO 6974

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/91

Characteristics

Units

Basis

Test method

minimum

maximum

Limits

Balance (1)

N2
Sulphur content

Wobbe Index (net)

% mole

% mole
mg/m3 (2)
MJ/m3 (3)

—

14

—

—

12

—

1

16

10

ISO 6974

ISO 6974

ISO 6326-5

39,4

38,2

40,6

Inerts (different from N2) + C2 + C2+.

(1)
(2) Value to be determined at 293,2 K (20 °C) and 101,3 kPa.
(3) Value to be determined at 273,2 K (0 °C) and 101,3 kPa.

2. Technical data on fuels for testing vehicles with compression ignition engines

Type: Diesel (B5)

Parameter

Unit

Limits (1)

Minimum

Maximum

Test method

kg/m3

52,0

833

54,0

EN-ISO 5165

837

EN-ISO 3675

Cetane number (2)

Density at 15 °C

Distillation:

— 50 % point

— 95 % point

— final boiling point

Flash point

CFPP

Viscosity at 40 °C

Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons

Sulphur content (3)

Copper corrosion

Conradson carbon residue (10 % DR)

Ash content

Water content

°C

°C

°C

°C

°C

mm2/s

% m/m

mg/kg

% m/m

% m/m

% m/m

Neutralisation (strong acid) number

mg KOH/g

Oxidation stability (4)

Lubricity (HFRR wear scan diameter at
60 °C)

Oxidation stability at 110 °C (4) (6)

FAME (5)

mg/ml

µm

h

% v/v

245

345

—

55

—

2,3

2,0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

350

370

—

– 5

3,3

6,0

10

EN-ISO 3405

EN-ISO 3405

EN-ISO 3405

EN 22719

EN 116

EN-ISO 3104

EN 12916

EN ISO 20846/EN ISO
20884

Class 1

EN-ISO 2160

0,2

0,01

0,02

0,02

EN-ISO10370

EN-ISO 6245

EN-ISO12937

ASTM D 974

0,025

EN-ISO12205

400

EN ISO 12156

20,0

4,5

EN 14112

5,5

EN 14078

(1) The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259 Petroleum
products — Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test have been applied and in fixing a
minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value,
the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the
manufacturer of fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in
the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements
of the specifications, the terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.

(2) The range for cetane number is not in accordance with the requirements of a minimum range of 4R. However, in the case of a
dispute between fuel supplier and fuel user, the terms of ISO 4259 may be used to resolve such disputes provided replicate mea-
surements, of sufficient number to archive the necessary precision, are made in preference to single determinations.

(3) The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the Type 1 test shall be reported.
(4) Even though oxidation stability is controlled, it is likely that shelf life will be limited. Advice shall be sought from the supplier as

to storage conditions and life.

(5) FAME content to meet the specification of EN 14214.
(6) Oxidation stability can be demonstrated by EN-ISO12205 or by EN 14112. This requirement shall be reviewed based on

CEN/TC19 evaluations of oxidative stability performance and test limits.

L 199/92

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

B. REFERENCE FUELS FOR TESTING EMISSIONS AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES — TYPE 6 TEST

Type: Petrol (E5)

Parameter

Unit

Research octane number, RON

Motor octane number, MON

Limits (1)

Minimum

Maximum

95,0

85,0

—

—

Density at 15 °C

kg/m3

743

756

Test method

EN 25164
prEN ISO 5164

EN 25163
prEN ISO 5163

ISO 3675
EN ISO 12185

Vapour pressure

Water content

Distillation:

— evaporated at 70 °C

— evaporated at 100 °C

— evaporated at 150 °C

— final boiling point

Residue

Hydrocarbon analysis:

— olefins

— aromatics

— benzene

— saturates

Carbon/hydrogen ratio

Carbon/oxygen ratio

Induction period (2)

Oxygen content (3)

Existent gum

Sulphur content (4)

Copper corrosion

Lead content

Phosphorus content (5)

Ethanol (3)

kPa

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

°C

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

% v/v

minutes

% m/m

mg/ml

mg/kg

mg/l

mg/l

% v/v

56,0

95,0

EN ISO 13016-1 (DVPE)

0,015

ASTM E 1064

24,0

50,0

82,0

190

—

3,0

29,0

—

44,0

60,0

90,0

210

EN-ISO 3405

EN-ISO 3405

EN-ISO 3405

EN-ISO 3405

2,0

EN-ISO 3405

13,0

35,0

1,0

ASTM D 1319

ASTM D 1319

EN 12177

ASTM D 1319

Report

Report

Report

480

—

EN-ISO 7536

Report

EN 1601

—

—

—

—

—

4,7

0,04

EN-ISO 6246

10

EN ISO 20846

EN ISO 20884

Class 1

EN-ISO 2160

5

1,3

5,3

EN 237

ASTM D 3231

EN 1601

EN 13132

(1) The values quoted in the specifications are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259 Petroleum —
products Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test have been applied and in fixing a minimum
value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value, the minimum
difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for technical reasons, the manufacturer of
fuels shall nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in the case of quotations
of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify whether a fuel meets the requirements of the specifications, the
terms of ISO 4259 shall be applied.

(2) The fuel may contain oxidation inhibitors and metal deactivators normally used to stabilise refinery gasoline streams, but

detergent/dispersive additives and solvent oils shall not be added.

(3) Ethanol to meet specification of EN 15376 is the only oxygenate that shall be intentionally added to this reference fuel.
(4) The actual sulphur content of the fuel used for the Type 6 test shall be reported.
(5) There shall be no intentional addition of compounds containing phosphorus, iron, manganese, or lead to this reference fuel.

Type: Ethanol (E75)

Reference fuel specification to be developed in advance of the dates set out in Article 10(6) of Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/93

ANNEX X

EMISSIONS TEST PROCEDURE FOR HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES (HEV)

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1. This annex sets out the additional specific provisions regarding type-approval of a hybrid electric vehicle (HEV).

2.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1. The technical requirements and specifications shall be those set out in Annex 14 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83 with

the exceptions described in the following section.

2.2. The references to paragraph 5.3.1.4 in sections 3.1.2.6, 3.1.3.5, 3.2.2.7 and 3.2.3.5 of Annex 14 of UN/ECE Regula-
tion No 83 shall be understood as references to Table 1 of Annex I of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 5 vehicles
and Table 2 of Annex I of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for Euro 6 vehicles.

L 199/94

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

ANNEX XI

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS (OBD) FOR MOTOR VEHICLES

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1.

This Annex sets out the functional aspects of on-board diagnostic (OBD) systems for the control of emissions from
motor vehicles.

2.

REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS

2.1.

The requirements and tests for OBD systems are those specified in Section 3 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83.
The exceptions to these requirements as well as additional requirements are described in the following sections.

2.2.

The durability distance mentioned in section 3.1 and 3.3.1 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be under-
stood as reference to the requirements of Annex VII to this Regulation.

2.3.

The threshold limits specified in section 3.3.2 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be understood as refer-
ence to the tables below:

2.3.1. The OBD thresholds limits for vehicles that are type approved according to the emission limits set out in Table 1 of

Annex I of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 are contained in the following table.

Euro 5 OBD threshold limits

Mass of carbon
monoxide

Mass of non-
methane hydro-
carbons

Mass of oxides of
nitrogen

Mass of particu-
lates

Reference mass
(RW)
(kg)

Category

Class

(CO)
(mg/km)

PI

CI

M

N1 (3)

— All

1 900

1 900

I

II

III

RW ≤ 1 305

1 900

1 900

1 305 < RW ≤ 1 760 3 400

2 400

1 760 < RW

4 300

2 800

N2

— All

4 300

2 800

(NMHC)
(mg/km)

(NOx)
(mg/km)

(PM)
(mg/km)

PI

250

250

330

400

400

CI

320

320

360

400

400

PI

300

300

375

410

410

CI

PI (1)

CI (2)

540

540

705

840

840

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition
(1) Positive ignition particulate mass standards apply only to vehicles with direct injection engines
(2) Until the dates set out in Article 17 a PM threshold limit of 80 mg/km shall apply to vehicles of categories M and N with a ref-

erence mass greater than 1 760 kg
Includes M1 vehicles that meet the ‘special social needs’ definition of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007

(3)

2.3.2. The OBD thresholds limits for compression ignition vehicles that comply with the Euro 6 emission limit values set
out in Table 2 of Annex 1 of the Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 and type-approved before the dates given in
Article 10(4) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 are contained in the following table. These threshold limits shall cease
to apply from the dates set out in Article 10(5) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for new vehicles to be registered,
sold or entered into service.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/95

Interim Euro 6 OBD threshold limits

Reference mass
(RW)
(kg)

Mass of carbon
monoxide

Mass of non-
methane hydro-
carbons

Mass of oxides
of nitrogen

Mass of particu-
lates

(CO)
(mg/km)

(NMHC)
(mg/km)

(NOx)
(mg/km)

(PM)
(mg/km)

Category

Class

M

N1

N2

—

I

II

III

—

All

RW ≤ 1 305

1 305 < RW ≤ 1 760

1 760 < RW

All

Key: CI = Compression Ignition

CI

1900

1900

2 400

2 800

2 800

CI

320

320

360

400

400

CI

240

240

315

375

375

CI

50

50

50

50

50

2.4.

In addition to the provisions of section 3.2.1 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 the manufacturer may tempo-
rarily disable the OBD system in the following conditions:

(a)

For flex fuel or mono/bi fuel gas vehicles during 1 minute after re-fuelling to allow for the recognition of fuel
quality and composition by the ECU;

(b)

For bi fuel vehicles during 5 seconds after fuel switching to allow for readjusting engine parameters.

The manufacturer may deviate from these time limits if it can demonstrate that stabilisation of the fuelling system
after re-fuelling or fuel switching takes longer for justified technical reasons. In any case, the OBD system shall be
re-enabled as soon as either the fuel quality and composition is recognised or the engine parameters are readjusted.

2.5.

Section 3.3.3.1 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be replaced by the following requirement:

The OBD system shall monitor the reduction in the efficiency of the catalytic converter with respect to emissions of
THC and NOx. Manufacturers may monitor the front catalyst alone or in combination with the next catalyst(s) down-
stream. Each monitored catalyst or catalyst combination shall be considered malfunctioning when the emissions
exceed the NMHC or NOx threshold limits provided for by section 2.3 of this Annex. By way of derogation the
requirement of monitoring the reduction in the efficiency of the catalytic converter with respect to NOx emissions
shall only apply as from the dates set out in Article 17.

2.6.

2.7.

Section 3.3.3.3 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall mean that the deterioration of all oxygen sensors fitted
and used for monitoring malfunctions of the catalytic converter according to the requirements of this Annex shall
be monitored.

In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.3 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, for direct injection positive
ignition engines any malfunction, which may lead to emissions exceeding the particulate threshold limits provided
for by section 2.3 of this Annex and which has to be monitored according to the requirements of this Annex for
compression ignition engines, shall be monitored.

2.8.

In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.4 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, malfunctions and the reduc-
tion in efficiency of the EGR system shall be monitored.

2.9.

In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.4 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, malfunctions and the reduc-
tion in efficiency of a NOx aftertreatment system using a reagent and the reagent dosing sub-system shall be
monitored.

2.10.

In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.4 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, malfunctions and the reduc-
tion in efficiency of NOx aftertreatment not using a reagent shall be monitored.

L 199/96

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

2.11.

In addition to the requirements of section 6.3.2 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83, the manu-
facturer shall demonstrate that malfunctions of the EGR flow and cooler are detected by the OBD system during its
approval test.

2.12. References to ‘HC’ (hydrocarbons) shall be read as ‘NMHC’ (non-methane hydrocarbons) in section 6.4.1.2 of Appen-

dix 1 to Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83.

2.13.

In addition to the requirements of section 6.5.1.3 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83, all data
required to be stored in relation to OBD in-use performance according to the provisions of section 3.6 of Appen-
dix 1 of this Annex shall be available through the serial data port on the standardised data link connector according
to the specifications given in section 6.5.3 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83.

3.

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS FOR DEFICIENCIES OF OBD SYSTEMS

3.1.

3.2.

3.3.

3.4.

3.5.

In considering the request for granting type-approval to a vehicle with a deficiency or deficiencies as set out in
Article 6(2), the approval authority shall determine whether compliance with the requirements of this Annex is infea-
sible or unreasonable.

The approval authority shall take into consideration data from the manufacturer that details such factors as, but not
limited to, technical feasibility, lead time and production cycles including phase-in or phase-out of engines or vehicle
designs and programmed upgrades of computers, the extent to which the resultant OBD system will be effective in
complying with the requirements of this Regulation and that the manufacturer has demonstrated an acceptable level
of effort toward compliance with the requirements of this Regulation.

The approval authority will not accept any deficiency request that includes the complete lack of a required diagnos-
tic monitor.

The approval authority will not accept any deficiency request that does not respect the OBD threshold limits in
Section 2.3.

In determining the identified order of deficiencies, deficiencies relating to sections 3.3.3.1, 3.3.3.2 and 3.3.3.3 of
Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 for positive-ignition engines and sections 3.3.4.1, 3.3.4.2 and 3.3.4.3 of
Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 for compression-ignition engines shall be identified first.

3.6.

Prior to or at the time of type-approval, no deficiency shall be granted in respect of the requirements of section 6.5,
except section 6.5.3.4 of Appendix 1 to Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83.

3.6. Deficiency period

3.6.1. A deficiency may be carried-over for a period of two years after the date of type-approval of the vehicle type unless
it can be adequately demonstrated that substantial vehicle hardware modifications and additional lead-time beyond
two years would be necessary to correct the deficiency. In such a case, the deficiency may be carried-over for a period
not exceeding three years.

3.6.2. A manufacturer may request that the approval authority grant a deficiency retrospectively when such a deficiency is
discovered after the original type-approval. In this case, the deficiency may be carried-over for a period of two years
after the date of notification to the approval authority unless it can be adequately demonstrated that substantial
vehicle hardware modifications and additional lead-time beyond two years would be necessary to correct the defi-
ciency. In such a case, the deficiency may be carried-over for a period not exceeding three years.

3.7.

The approval authority shall notify its decision in granting a deficiency request in accordance with Article 6(2).

4.

ACCESS TO OBD INFORMATION

4.1.

4.2.

4.3.

Requirements for access to OBD information are specified in section 5 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83. The
exceptions to these requirements are described in the following sections.

References to Appendix 1 of Annex 2 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be understood as references to Appendix 5 to
Annex I to this Regulation.

References to section 4.2.11.2.7.6 of Annex 1 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be understood as references
to 3.2.12.2.7.6 of Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/97

4.4.

References to ‘contracting parties’ shall be understood as references to ‘member states’.

4.5.

References to approval granted under Regulation 83 shall be understood as references to type-approval granted under
this Regulation and Council Directive 70/220/EEC (1).

4.6.

UN/ECE type-approval shall be understood as EC type-approval.

(1) OJ L 76, 6.4.1971, p. 1.

L 199/98

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 1

FUNCTIONAL ASPECTS OF ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEMS

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1.

This Appendix describes the procedure of the test according to section 2 of this Annex.

2.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.

2.2.

2.3.

2.4.

2.5.

The technical requirements and specifications shall be those set out in Appendix 1 to Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regu-
lation No 83 with the exceptions and additional requirements as described in the following sections.

The references to the OBD threshold limits set out in paragraph 3.3.2 to Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall
be understood as references to the limits set out in section 2.3 of this Annex.

The reference fuels specified in paragraph 3.2 of Appendix 1 of Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be
understood as reference to the appropriate reference fuel specifications in Annex IX to this Regulation.

The reference to Annex 11 in paragraph 6.5.1.4 of Appendix 1 of Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation No 83 shall be
understood as reference to Annex XI to this Regulation.

For vehicles approved to Euro 6 limit values contained in Table 2 of Annex 1 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, Sec-
tion 6.5.3.1 of Appendix 1 of Annex 11 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 shall be replaced by:

‘For emissions-related diagnostics, the following standard shall be used as the on-board to off-board communica-
tions link:

ISO 15765-4 “Road vehicles — Diagnostics on Controller Area Network (CAN) — Part 4: Requirements for
emissions-related systems” dated 10 January 2005’

3.

IN-USE PERFORMANCE

3.1.

General Requirements

3.1.1. Each monitor of the OBD system shall be executed at least once per driving cycle in which the monitoring condi-
tions as specified in section 3.2 are met. Manufacturers may not use the calculated ratio (or any element thereof) or
any other indication of monitor frequency as a monitoring condition for any monitor.

3.1.2. The in-use performance ratio (IUPR) of a specific monitor M of the OBD system referred to in Article 5(3) shall be:

IUPRM = NumeratorM/DenominatorM

3.1.3. Comparison of Numerator and Denominator gives an indication of how often a specific monitor is operating rela-
tive to vehicle operation. To ensure all manufacturers are tracking IUPRM in the same manner, detailed requirements
are given for defining and incrementing these counters.

3.1.4.

If, according to the requirements of this Annex, the vehicle is equipped with a specific monitor M, IUPRM shall be
greater or equal to the following minimum values:

(i)

0,260 for secondary air system monitors and other cold start related monitors

(ii) 0,520 for evaporative emission purge control monitors

(iii) 0,336 for all other monitors

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/99

3.1.5. Vehicles shall comply with the requirements of section 3.1.4 for a mileage of at least 160 000 km. By way of dero-
gation, vehicles type approved, registered, sold or entered into service before the relevant dates given in Article 10(4),
(5) of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, shall have an IUPRM greater or equal 0,1 for all monitors M.

3.1.6. The requirements of this section are deemed to be met for a particular monitor M, if for all vehicles of a particular

OBD family manufactured in a particular calendar year the following statistical conditions hold:

(a) The average IUPRM is equal or above the minimum value applicable to the monitor

(b) More than 50 % of all vehicles have an IUPRM equal or above the minimum value applicable to the monitor.

3.1.7. The manufacturer shall demonstrate to the approval authority and on request to the Commission that these statis-
tical conditions are satisfied for vehicles manufactured in a given calendar year for all monitors required to be
reported by the OBD system according to section 3.6 of this Appendix not later than 18 months after the end of a
calendar year. For this purpose, statistical tests shall be used which implement recognised statistical principles and
confidence levels.

3.1.8. For demonstration purposes of this section the manufacturer may group vehicles within an OBD family by any other
successive and non-overlapping 12 month manufacturing periods instead of calendar years. For establishing the test
sample of vehicles at least the selection criteria of Annex II, Appendix 1, point 2 shall be applied. For the entire test
sample of vehicles the manufacturer must report to the approval authority all of the in-use performance data to be
reported by the OBD system according to section 3.6 of this Appendix. Upon request, the approval authority which
grants the approval shall make these data and the results of the statistical evaluation available to the Commission
and other approval authorities.

3.1.9. Public authorities and their delegates may pursue further tests on vehicles or collect appropriate data recorded by

vehicles to verify compliance with the requirements of this Annex.

3.2.

NumeratorM

3.2.1. The numerator of a specific monitor is a counter measuring the number of times a vehicle has been operated such
that all monitoring conditions necessary for the specific monitor to detect a malfunction in order to warn the driver,
as they have been implemented by the manufacturer, have been encountered. The numerator shall not be incre-
mented more than once per driving cycle, unless there is reasoned technical justification.

3.3. DenominatorM

3.3.1. The purpose of the denominator is to provide a counter indicating the number of vehicle driving events, taking into
account special conditions for a specific monitor. The denominator shall be incremented at least once per driving
cycle, if during this driving cycle such conditions are met and the general denominator is incremented as specified in
section 3.5 unless the denominator is disabled according to section 3.7 of this Appendix..

3.3.2.

In addition to the requirements of section 3.3.1:

(a)

Secondary air system monitor denominator(s) shall be incremented if the commanded ‘on’ operation of the sec-
ondary air system occurs for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds. For purposes of determining this com-
manded ‘on’ time, the OBD system may not include time during intrusive operation of the secondary air system
solely for the purposes of monitoring;

(b) Denominators of monitors of systems only active during cold start shall be incremented if the component or

strategy is commanded ‘on’ for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds;

(c) The denominator(s) for monitors of Variable Valve Timing (VVT) and/or control systems shall be incremented
if the component is commanded to function (e.g., commanded ‘on’, ‘open’, ‘closed’, ‘locked’, etc.) on two or more
occasions during the driving cycle or for a time greater than or equal to 10 seconds, whichever occurs first;

(d)

For the following monitors, the denominator(s) shall be incremented by one if, in addition to meeting the
requirements of this section on at least one driving cycle, at least 800 cumulative kilometres of vehicle opera-
tion have been experienced since the last time the denominator was incremented:

(i) Diesel oxidation catalyst

(ii) Diesel particulate filter

L 199/100

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.3.3. For hybrid vehicles, vehicles that employ alternative engine start hardware or strategies (e.g. integrated starter
and generators), or alternative fuel vehicles (e.g. dedicated, bi-fuel, or dual-fuel applications), the manufacturer may
request the approval of the approval authority to use alternative criteria to those set forth in this section for incre-
menting the denominator. In general, the approval authority shall not approve alternative criteria for vehicles that
only employ engine shut off at or near idle/vehicle stop conditions. Approval by the approval authority of the alter-
native criteria shall be based on the equivalence of the alternative criteria to determine the amount of vehicle opera-
tion relative to the measure of conventional vehicle operation in accordance with the criteria in this section.

3.4.

Ignition Cycle Counter

3.4.1. The ignition cycle counter indicates the number of ignition cycles a vehicle has experienced. The ignition cycle

counter may not be incremented more than once per driving cycle.

3.5.

General Denominator

3.5.1. The general denominator is a counter measuring the number of times a vehicle has been operated. It shall be incre-

mented within 10 seconds, if and only if, the following criteria are satisfied on a single driving cycle:

— Cumulative time since engine start is greater than or equal to 600 seconds while at an elevation of less than

2 440 m above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to – 7 °C.,

— Cumulative vehicle operation at or above 40 km/h occurs for greater than or equal to 300 seconds while at an
elevation of less than 2 440 m above sea level and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to – 7 °C.,

— Continuous vehicle operation at idle (i.e. accelerator pedal released by driver and vehicle speed less than or equal
to 1,6 km/h) for greater than or equal to 30 seconds while at an elevation of less than 2 440 m above sea level
and at an ambient temperature of greater than or equal to – 7 °C.

3.6.

Reporting and increasing counters

3.6.1. The OBD system shall report in accordance with the ISO 15031-5 specifications the ignition cycle counter and gen-
eral denominator as well as separate numerators and denominators for the following monitors, if their presence on
the vehicle is required by this Annex:

— Catalysts (each bank to be reported separately),

— Oxygen/exhaust gas sensors, including secondary oxygen sensors (each sensor to be reported separately),

— Evaporative system,

— EGR system,

— VVT system,

— Secondary air system,

— Particulate filter,

— NOx aftertreatment system (e.g. NOx adsorber, NOx reagent/catalyst system),

— Boost pressure control system,

3.6.2. For specific components or systems that have multiple monitors, which are required to be reported by this section
(e.g. oxygen sensor bank 1 may have multiple monitors for sensor response or other sensor characteristics), the OBD
system shall separately track numerators and denominators for each of the specific monitors and report only the
corresponding numerator and denominator for the specific monitor that has the lowest numerical ratio. If two or
more specific monitors have identical ratios, the corresponding numerator and denominator for the specific moni-
tor that has the highest denominator shall be reported for the specific component.

3.6.3. All counters, when incremented, shall be incremented by an integer of one.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/101

3.6.4. The minimum value of each counter is 0, the maximum value shall not be less than 65 535, notwithstanding any

other requirements on standardised storage and reporting of the OBD system.

3.6.5.

If either the numerator or denominator for a specific monitor reaches its maximum value, both counters for that
specific monitor shall be divided by two before being incremented again according to the provisions set in sec-
tions 3.2 and 3.3. If the ignition cycle counter or the general denominator reaches its maximum value, the respec-
tive counter shall change to zero at its next increment according to the provisions set in sections 3.4 and 3.5,
respectively.

3.6.6. Each counter shall be reset to zero only when a non-volatile memory reset occurs (e.g. reprogramming event, etc.)
or, if the numbers are stored in keep-alive memory (KAM), when KAM is lost due to an interruption in electrical
power to the control module (e.g. battery disconnect, etc.).

3.6.7. The manufacturer shall take measures to ensure that the values of numerator and denominator can not be reset or

modified, except in cases provided for explicitly in this section.

3.7. Disablement of Numerators and Denominators and of the General Denominator

3.7.1. Within 10 seconds of a malfunction being detected, which disables a monitor required to meet the monitoring con-
ditions of this Annex (i.e. a pending or confirmed code is stored), the OBD system shall disable further incrementing
of the corresponding numerator and denominator for each monitor that is disabled. When the malfunction is no
longer detected (i.e., the pending code is erased through self-clearing or through a scan tool command), increment-
ing of all corresponding numerators and denominators shall resume within 10 seconds.

3.7.2. Within 10 seconds of the start of a power take-off operation (PTO) operation that disables a monitor required to
meet the monitoring conditions of this Annex, the OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the correspond-
ing numerator and denominator for each monitor that is disabled. When the PTO operation ends, incrementing of
all corresponding numerators and denominators shall resume within 10 seconds.

3.7.3. The OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the numerator and denominator of a specific monitor within
10 seconds, if a malfunction of any component used to determine the criteria within the definition of the specific
monitor’s denominator (i.e. vehicle speed, ambient temperature, elevation, idle operation, engine cold start, or time
of operation) has been detected and the corresponding pending fault code has been stored. Incrementing of the
numerator and denominator shall resume within 10 seconds when the malfunction is no longer present (e.g. pend-
ing code erased through self-clearing or by a scan tool command).

3.7.4. The OBD system shall disable further incrementing of the general denominator within 10 seconds, if a malfunction
has been detected of any component used to determine whether the criteria in section 3.5 are satisfied (i.e. vehicle
speed, ambient temperature, elevation, idle operation, or time of operation) and the corresponding pending fault
code has been stored. The general denominator may not be disabled from incrementing for any other condition.
Incrementing of the general denominator shall resume within 10 seconds when the malfunction is no longer present
(e.g., pending code erased through self-clearing or by a scan tool command).

L 199/102

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 2

ESSENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VEHICLE FAMILY

1.

PARAMETERS DEFINING THE OBD FAMILY

1.1. The OBD family means a manufacturer’s grouping of vehicles which, through their design, are expected to have simi-
lar exhaust emission and OBD system characteristics. Each engine of this family shall comply with the requirements of
this Regulation.

1.2. The OBD family may be defined by basic design parameters which shall be common to vehicles within the family. In
some cases there may be interaction of parameters. These effects shall also be taken into consideration to ensure that
only vehicles with similar exhaust emission characteristics are included within an OBD family.

2.

To this end, those vehicle types whose parameters described below are identical are considered to belong to the same
engine/emission control/OBD system combination.

Engine:

— combustion process (i.e. positive-ignition/compression-ignition, two stroke/four stroke/rotary),

— method of engine fuelling (i.e. single or multi-point fuel injection),

— fuel type (i.e. petrol, diesel, flex fuel petrol/ethanol, flex fuel diesel/biodiesel, NG/biomethane, LPG, bi fuel

petrol/NG/biomethane, bi fuel petrol/LPG),

Emission control system:

— type of catalytic converter (i. e. oxidation, three-way, heated catalyst, SCR, other),

— type of particulate trap,

— secondary air injection (i.e. with or without),

— exhaust gas recirculation (i.e. with or without),

OBD parts and functioning:

— the methods of OBD functional monitoring, malfunction detection and malfunction indication to the vehicle

driver.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/103

ANNEX XII

DETERMINATION OF CO2 EMISSIONS AND FUEL CONSUMPTION

1.

INTRODUCTION

This Annex sets out the requirements for the measurement of CO2 emissions and fuel consumption.

2.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.

The general specifications for conducting the tests and interpreting the results shall be those set out in Section 5 of
UN/ECE Regulation 101 with the exceptions specified below.

2.2.

Test fuel

2.2.1. The appropriate reference fuels as defined in Annex IX of this Regulation shall be used for testing.

2.2.2. For LPG and NG, that fuel shall be used which is chosen by the manufacturer for the measurement of the net power
in accordance with Annex I to Council Directive 80/1269/EEC (1). The chosen fuel shall be specified in the infor-
mation document as defined in Appendix 3 to Annex I of this Regulation.

2.3.

Paragraph 5.2.4. of UN/ECE Regulation 101 shall read:

(1) density: measured on the test fuel according to ISO 3675 or an equivalent method. For petrol, diesel, biodiesel
and ethanol (E85) the density measured at 15 °C will be used; for LPG and natural gas/biomethane a reference
density will be used, as follows:

0,538 kg/litre for LPG

0,654 kg/m3 for NG

(2) hydrogen-carbon-oxygen ratio:fixed values will be used which are:

C1H1,89O0,016 for petrol,

C1H1,86O0,005 for diesel,

C1H2,525 for LPG (liquefied petroleum gas),

CH4 for NG (natural gas) and biomethane,

C1H2,74O0,385 for ethanol (E85).

3.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1.

The technical requirements and specifications for the measurement of CO2 emissions, fuel consumption or electric
energy consumption shall be those set out in Annexes 6 to 10 to UN/ECE Regulation 101 with the exceptions speci-
fied below.

3.2.

In Annex 6, section 1.3.5 of UN/ECE Regulation 101 the tyres used shall meet the same selection criteria as those
specified for the type 1 emissions test, set out in Annex III section 3.5 of this Regulation.

3.3.

In Annex 6 of UN/ECE Regulation 101, section 1.4.3 shall be replaced by the following:

‘1.4.3. The fuel consumption, expressed in litres per 100 km (in the case of petrol, LPG, ethanol (E85) and diesel) or
in m3 per 100 km (in the case of NG/biomethane) is calculated by means of the following formulae:

(a)

for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with petrol (E5):

FC = (0,118/D) ∙ [(0,848 ∙ HC) + (0,429 ∙ CO) + (0,273 ∙ CO2)]

(1) OJ L 375, 31.12.1980, p. 46.

L 199/104

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

(b)

for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with LPG:

FCnorm = (0,1212/0,538) ∙ [(0,825 ∙ HC) + (0,429 ∙ CO) + (0,273 ∙ CO2)]

If the composition of the fuel used for the test differs from the composition that is assumed for the calculation
of the normalised consumption, on the manufacturer’s request a correction factor cf may be applied, as follows:

FCnorm = (0,1212/0,538) ∙ (cf) ∙ [(0,825 ∙ HC) + (0,429 ∙ CO) + (0,273 ∙ CO2)]

The correction factor cf, which may be applied, is determined as follows:

cf = 0,825 + 0,0693 nactual

where:

nactual = the actual H/C ratio of the fuel used

(c)

for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with NG/biomethane:

FCnorm = (0,1336/0,654) ∙ [(0,749 ∙ HC) + (0,429 ∙ CO) + (0,273 ∙ CO2)]

(d)

for vehicles with a positive ignition engine fuelled with ethanol (E85):

FC = (0,1742/D) ∙ [(0,574 ∙ HC) + (0,429 ∙ CO) + (0,273 ∙ CO2)]

(e)

for vehicles with a compression ignition engine fuelled with diesel (B5):

FC = (0,116/D) ∙ [(0,861 ∙ HC) + (0,429 ∙ CO) + (0,273 ∙ CO2)]

In these formulae:

FC

=

the fuel consumption in litre per 100 km (in the case of petrol, ethanol, LPG diesel or biodiesel) or in m3
per 100 km (in the case of natural gas)

HC =

the measured emission of hydrocarbons in g/km

CO =

the measured emission of carbon monoxide in g/km

CO2 =

the measured emission of carbon dioxide in g/km

D

=

the density of the test fuel.

In the case of gaseous fuels this is the density at 15 °C.’

3.4.

In Annex 8 of UN/ECE Regulation 101, references to Annex 4 shall be understood as reference to Appendix 4 of
Annex I of this Regulation.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/105

ANNEX XIII

EC TYPE-APPROVAL OF REPLACEMENT POLLUTION CONTROL DEVICES AS
SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNIT

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1.

This Annex contains additional requirement for the type-approval as separate technical units of pollution control
devices.

2.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.

Marking

Original replacement pollution control devices shall bear at least the following identifications:

(a)

the vehicle manufacturer’s name or trade mark;

(b)

the make and identifying part number of the original replacement pollution control device as recorded in the
information mentioned in point 2.3.

2.2.

Documentation

Original replacement pollution control devices shall be accompanied by the following information:

(a)

the vehicle manufacturer’s name or trade mark;

(b)

(c)

the make and identifying part number of the original replacement pollution control device as recorded in the
information mentioned in point 2.3;

the vehicles for which the original replacement pollution control device is of a type covered by point 2.3 of
the Addendum to Appendix 4 to Annex I, including, where applicable, a marking to identify if the original
replacement pollution control device is suitable for fitting to a vehicle that is equipped with an on-board diag-
nostic (OBD) system;

(d)

installation instructions, where necessary.

This information shall be available in the product catalogue distributed to points of sale by the vehicle manufacturer.

2.3.

The vehicle manufacturer shall provide to the technical service and/or approval authority the necessary informa-
tion in electronic format which makes the link between the relevant part numbers and the type-approval
documentation.

This information shall contain the following:

(a) make(s) and type(s) of vehicle,

(b) make(s) and type(s) of original replacement pollution control device,

(c)

part number(s) of original replacement pollution control device,

(d)

type-approval number of the relevant vehicle type(s).

3.

EC SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNIT TYPE-APPROVAL MARK

3.1.

Every replacement pollution control device conforming to the type approved under this Regulation as a separate
technical unit shall bear an EC type-approval mark.

L 199/106

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.2.

This mark shall consist of a rectangle surrounding the lower-case letter ‘e’ followed by the distinguishing number
or letter(s) of the Member State which has granted the EC type-approval:

1.

for Germany

2.

for France

3.

for Italy

4.

for the Netherlands

5.

for Sweden

6.

for Belgium

7.

for Hungary

8.

for Czech Republic

9.

for Spain

11.

for the United Kingdom

12.

for Austria

13.

for Luxembourg

17.

for Finland

18.

for Denmark

19.

for Romania

20.

for Poland

21.

for Portugal

23.

for Greece

24.

for Ireland

26.

for Slovenia

27.

for Slovakia

29.

for Estonia

32.

for Latvia

34.

for Bulgaria

36.

for Lithuania

49.

for Cyprus

50.

for Malta

The EC type- approval mark shall also include in the vicinity of the rectangle the ‘base approval number’ contained
in section 4 of the type-approval number referred to in Annex VII to Directive 2007/46/EC, preceded by the two
figures indicating the sequence number assigned to the latest major technical amendment to Regulation (EC)
No 715/2007 or this Regulation on the date EC type-approval for a separate technical unit was granted. For this
Regulation, the sequence number is 00.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/107

3.3.

The EC type-approval mark shall be affixed to the replacement pollution control device in such a way as to be
clearly legible and indelible. It shall, wherever possible, be visible when the replacement pollution control device is
installed on the vehicle.

3.4.

Appendix 3 to this Annex gives example of the EC type- approval mark..

4.

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1.

The requirements for the type-approval of replacement pollution control devices shall be those of Section 5 of
UN/ECE Regulation 103 with the exceptions set out in sections 4.1.1 to 4.1.4.

4.1.1.

The terms ‘catalytic converter’ and ‘converter’ used in section 5 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 shall be understood to
mean ‘pollution control device’

4.1.2.

The regulated pollutants referred to throughout section 5.2.3 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 shall be replaced by all
the pollutants specified in Annex 1, Tables 1 and 2 of Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 for replacement pollution
control devices intended to be fitted to vehicles type approved to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.1.3.

For replacement pollution control devices standards intended to be fitted to vehicles type approved to Regulation
(EC) No 715/2007, the durability requirements and associated deterioration factors specified in section 5 of
UN/ECE Regulation 103, shall refer to those specified in Annex VII of this Regulation.

4.1.4.

Reference to Appendix 1 of the type-approval communication in section 5.5.3 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 shall be
understood as reference to the addendum to the EC type-approval certificate on vehicle OBD information (Appen-
dix 5 to Annex I).

4.2.

For vehicles with positive-ignition engines, if the THC and NMHC emissions measured during the demonstration
test of a new original equipment catalytic converter, under paragraph 5.2.1 of UN/ECE Regulation 103, are higher
than the values measured during the type-approval of the vehicle, the difference shall be added to the OBD thresh-
old limits. The OBD threshold limits are specified in either:

(a)

point 3.3.2 of Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 for replacement parts intended to be fitted on vehicles
type-approved to Directive 70/220/EEC; or

(b) point 2.3 of Annex XI of this Regulation for replacement parts intended to be fitted on vehicles type-approved

to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007.

4.3.

The revised OBD threshold limits will apply during the tests of OBD compatibility set out in paragraphs 5.5
to 5.5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation 103. In particular, when the exceedance allowed in paragraph 1 of Appendix 1 to
Annex 11 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 is applied.

4.4.

Requirements for replacement periodically regenerating systems

4.4.1.

Requirements regarding emissions

4.4.1.1. The vehicle(s) indicated in Article 11(3), equipped with a replacement periodically regenerating system of the type
for which approval is requested, shall be subject to the tests described in Section 3 of Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regu-
lation 83, in order to compare its performance with the same vehicle equipped with the original periodically regen-
erating system.

4.4.2.

Determination of the basis for comparison

4.4.2.1. The vehicle shall be fitted with a new original periodically regenerating system. The emissions performance of this
system shall be determined following the test procedure set out in section 3 of Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation 83.

4.4.2.2. Upon request of the applicant for the approval of the replacement component, the approval authority shall make
available on a non-discriminatory basis, the information referred to in points 3.2.12.2.1.11.1 and 3.2.12.2.6.4.1
of the information document contained in Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation for each vehicle tested.

L 199/108

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

4.4.3.

Exhaust gas test with a replacement periodically regeneration system

4.4.3.1. The original equipment periodically regenerating system of the test vehicle(s) shall be replaced by the replacement
periodically regenerating system. The emissions performance of this system shall be determined following the test
procedure set out in paragraph 3 Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation 83.

4.4.3.2. To determine the D-factor of the replacement periodically regenerating system, any of the engine bench methods

referred to in paragraph 3 of Annex 13 of UN/ECE Regulation 83 may be used.

4.4.4.

Other requirements

The requirements of paragraphs 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5 of UN/ECE Regulation 103 shall apply to replacement peri-
odically regenerating systems. In these paragraphs the words ‘catalytic converter’ shall be understood to mean ‘peri-
odically regenerating system’. In addition the exceptions made to these paragraphs in section 4.1 of this annex shall
also apply to periodically regenerating systems.

5.

DOCUMENTATION

5.1.

Each replacement pollution control device shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the manufacturer’s name or
trade mark and accompanied by the following information:

(a)

the vehicles (including year of manufacture) for which the replacement pollution control device is approved,
including, where applicable, a marking to identify if the replacement pollution control device is suitable for
fitting to a vehicle that is equipped with an on-board diagnostic (OBD) system;

(b)

installation instructions, where necessary.

The information shall be available in the product catalogue distributed to points of sale by the manufacturer
of replacement pollution control devices.

6.

CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

6.1.

Measures to ensure the conformity of production shall be taken in accordance with the provisions laid down in
Article 12 of Directive 2007/46/EC.

6.2.

Special provisions

6.2.1.

The checks referred to in point 2.2 of Annex X to Directive 2007/46/EC shall include compliance with the char-
acteristics as defined under point 8 of Article 2 of this Regulation.

6.2.2.

For the application of Article 12(2) of Directive 2007/46/EC, the tests described in section 4.4.1 of this Annex and
section 5.2 of UN/ECE Regulation No 103 (requirements regarding emissions) may be carried out. In this case, the
holder of the approval may request, as an alternative, to use as a basis for comparison not the original equipment
pollution control device, but the replacement pollution control device which was used during the type-approval
tests (or another sample that has been proven to conform to the approved type). Emissions values measured with
the sample under verification shall then on average not exceed by more than 15 % the mean values measured with
the sample used for reference.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/109

Appendix 1

MODEL

Information document No …

relating to the EC type-approval of replacement pollution control devices

The following information, if applicable, must be supplied in triplicate and include a list of contents. Any drawings must be
supplied in appropriate scale and sufficient detail on size A4 or on a folder of A4 format. Photographs, if any, must show
sufficient detail.

If the systems, components or separate technical units have electronic controls, information concerning their performance
must be supplied.

0.

GENERAL

0.1. Make (trade name of manufacturer): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.2.

Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.2.1. Commercial name(s), if available:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.5.

Name and address of manufacturer:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name and address of authorised representative, if any:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.7.

In the case of components and separate technical units, location and method of affixing of the EC approval mark: .

0.8.

Address(es) of assembly plant(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.

DESCRIPTION OF THE DEVICE

1.1. Make and type of the replacement pollution control device:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.

Drawings of the replacement pollution control device, identifying in particular all the characteristics referred to under
point 8 of Article 2 of [this Regulation]: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.

Description of the vehicle type or types for which the replacement pollution control device is intended:

. . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.1. Number(s) and/or symbol(s) characterising the engine and vehicle type(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.2.

Is the replacement pollution control device intended to be compatible with OBD requirements (Yes/No) (1)

1.4.

Description and drawings showing the position of the replacement pollution control device relative to the engine
exhaust manifold(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable

L 199/110

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 2

MODEL EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

(Maximum format: A4 (210 mm × 297 mm))

EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE

Stamp of administration

Communication concerning the:

— EC type-approval (1),

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,

— extension of EC type-approval (1), . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,

— refusal of EC type-approval (1),

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,

— withdrawal of EC type-approval (1),

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,

of a type of component/separate technical unit (1)

with regard to Regulation (EC) No 715/2007, as implemented by Regulation (EC) No 692/2008.

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 or Regulation (EC) No 692/2008 as last amended by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EC type-approval number:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reason for extension: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION I

0.1. Make (trade name of manufacturer): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.2.

Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.3. Means of identification of type if marked on the component/separate technical unit (2): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.3.1. Location of that marking:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.5.

Name and address of manufacturer:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.7.

In the case of components and separate technical units, location and method of affixing of the EC approval mark: .

0.8.

Name and address(es) of assembly plant(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0.9.

Name and address of manufacturer’s representative (if any):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable
(2)

If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types
covered by this type-approval certificate such characters shall be represented in the document by the symbol:’?’ (e.g. ABC??123??).

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/111

SECTION II

1.

Additional information

1.1. Make and type of the replacement pollution control device:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.

Vehicle type(s) for which the pollution control device type qualifies as replacement part:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.

Type(s) of vehicles) on which the replacement pollution control device has been tested:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.1. Has the replacement pollution control device demonstrated compatibility with OBD requirements (yes/no) (1):

. . . .

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date of test report:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Number of test report: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remarks:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Place: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Signature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attachments:

Information package.

Test report.

(1) Delete where not applicable

L 199/112

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 3

Example of the EC type-approval marks

(see point 5.2 of this Annex)

The above approval mark affixed to a component of a replacement pollution control device shows that the type concerned
has been approved in France (e 2), pursuant to this Regulation. The first two digits of the approval number (00) indicate that
this part was approved according to this Regulation. The following four digits (1234) are those allocated by the approval
authority to the replacement pollution control device as the base approval number.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/113

ANNEX XIV

Access to vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1. This Annex lays down technical requirements for the accessibility of vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance

information.

2.

REQUIREMENTS

2.1. Vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information available through websites shall follow the technical
specifications of OASIS Document SC2-D5, Format of Automotive Repair Information, version 1.0, 28 May 2003 (1)
and of Sections 3.2, 3,5, (excluding 3.5.2), 3,6, 3.7 and 3,8 of OASIS Document SC1-D2, Autorepair Requirements
Specification, version 6.1, dated 10.1.2003 (2), using only open text and graphic formats or formats which can be
viewed and printed using only standard software plug-ins that are freely available, easy to install, and which run under
computer operating systems commonly in use. Where possible, keywords in the meta data shall conform to
ISO 15031-2. Such information shall be always available, except as required for web-site maintenance purposes. Those
requiring the right to duplicate or re-publish the information should negotiate directly with the manufacturer con-
cerned. Information for training material shall also be available, but may be presented through other media than
web-sites.

2.2. Access to vehicle security features used by authorised dealers and repair shops shall be made available to independent
operators under protection of ISO security standard 15764 using security certificates in accordance with ISO 20828.
The independent operator shall be accredited and authorised for this purpose on the basis of documents demonstrat-
ing that they pursue a legitimate business activity and have not been convicted of relevant criminal activity.

2.3. Reprogramming of vehicle control units shall be conducted in accordance with SAE J2534.

2.4. All emission-related fault codes shall be consistent with Appendix 1 to Annex XI.

2.5. For access to any vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information other than that relating to secure areas
of the vehicle, registration requirements for use of the manufacturer’s web site by an independent operator shall require
only such information as is necessary to confirm how payment for the information is to be made. For information
concerning access to secure areas of the vehicle, the independent operator shall present a certificate in accordance with
ISO 20828 to identify himself and the organisation to which he belongs and the manufacturer shall respond with his
own certificate in accordance with ISO 20828 to confirm to the independent operator that he is accessing a legitimate
site of the intended manufacturer. Both parties shall keep a log of any such transactions indicating the vehicles and
changes made to them under this provision.

2.6.

In the event that vehicle OBD and vehicle repair and maintenance information available on a manufacturer’s website
does not contain specific relevant information to permit the proper design and manufacture of alternative fuels ret-
rofit systems, then any interested alternative fuels retrofit system manufacturer shall be able to access the information
required in paragraphs 0, 2, and 3 of Appendix 3 to Annex 1 by contacting the manufacturer directly with such a
request. Contact details for that purpose shall be clearly indicated on the manufacturer’s website and the information
shall be provided within 30 days. Such information need only be provided for alternative fuels retrofit systems that are
subject to UN/ECE Regulation 115 or for alternative fuels retrofit components that form part of systems subject to
UN/ECE Regulation 115, and need only be provided in response to a request that clearly specifies the exact specifica-
tion of the vehicle model for which the information is required and that specifically confirms that the information is
required for the development of alternative fuels retrofit systems or components subject to UN/ECE Regulation 115.

(1) Available at: http://www.oasis-open.org/committees/download.php/2412/Draft%20Committee%20Specification.pdf
(2) Available at: http://lists.oasis-open.org/archives/autorepair/200302/pdf00005.pdf

L 199/114

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

2.7. Manufacturers shall indicate in their repair information websites the type-approval number by model.

2.8. Manufacturers shall establish fees for hourly, daily, monthly and annual access to their repair information websites

which are reasonable and proportionate.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/115

Appendix 1

L 199/116

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/117

L 199/118

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

IN-SERVICE CONFORMITY OF VEHICLES TYPE-APPROVED UNDER DIRECTIVE 70/220/EEC

ANNEX XV

1.

CONFORMITY OF IN-SERVICE VEHICLES

1.1.

An audit of in-service conformity shall be conducted by the approval authority on the basis of any relevant infor-
mation in possession of the manufacturer, under procedures similar to those defined in Article 10(1) and (2) and in
points 1 and 2 of Annex X to Directive 70/156/EEC.

1.2.

The Figure referred to under point 4 of Appendix 2 to this Annex and Figure 4/2 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regu-
lation 83 illustrate the procedure for in-service conformity checking.

1.3.

Parameters defining the in-service family

The in-service family may be defined by basic design parameters which shall be common to vehicles within the
family. Accordingly, those vehicle types which have in common, or within the stated tolerances, at least the param-
eters set out in points 1.3.1 to 1.3.11, can be considered as belonging to the same in-service family.

1.3.1.

combustion process (two stroke, four stroke, rotary).

1.3.2.

number of cylinders.

1.3.3.

configuration of the cylinder block (in-line, V, radial, horizontally opposed, other). The inclination or orientation
of the cylinders is not a criteria).

1.3.4. method of engine fuelling (e.g. indirect or direct injection).

1.3.5.

type of cooling system (air, water, oil).

1.3.6. method of aspiration (naturally aspirated, pressure charged).

1.3.7.

fuel for which the engine is designed (petrol, diesel, NG, LPG, etc.). Bi fuelled vehicles may be grouped with dedi-
cated fuel vehicles providing one of the fuels is common.

1.3.8.

type of catalytic converter (three-way catalyst or other(s)).

1.3.9.

type of particulate trap (with or without).

1.3.10. exhaust gas recirculation (with or without).

1.3.11. engine cylinder capacity of the largest engine within the family minus 30 %.

1.4.

An audit of in-service conformity shall be conducted by the approval authority on the basis of information sup-
plied by the manufacturer. Such information shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

1.4.1.

the name and address of the manufacturer;

1.4.2.

the name, address, telephone and fax numbers and e-mail address of his authorised representative within the areas
covered by the manufacturer’s information;

1.4.3.

the model name(s) of the vehicles included in the manufacturer’s information;

1.4.4. where appropriate, the list of vehicle types covered within the manufacturer’s information, i.e. the in-service family

group in accordance with section 1.3;

1.4.5.

the vehicle identification number (VIN) codes applicable to these vehicle types within the in-service family (VIN
prefix);

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/119

1.4.6.

the numbers of the type-approvals applicable to these vehicle types within the in-service family, including, where
applicable, the numbers of all extensions and field fixes/recalls (re-works);

1.4.7.

details of extensions, field fixes/recalls to those type-approvals for the vehicles covered within the manufacturer’s
information (if requested by the approval authority);

1.4.8.

the period of time over which the manufacturer’s information was collected;

1.4.9.

the vehicle build period covered within the manufacturer’s information (e.g. vehicles manufactured during the 2001
calendar year);

1.4.10.

the manufacturer’s in-service conformity checking procedure, including:

(a)

vehicle location method;

(b)

vehicle selection and rejection criteria;

(c)

test types and procedures used for the programme;

(d)

the manufacturer’s acceptance/rejection criteria for the in-service family group;

(e)

geographical area(s) within which the manufacturer has collected information;

(f)

sample size and sampling plan used;

1.4.11.

the results from the manufacturer’s in-service conformity procedure, including:

(a)

identification of the vehicles included in the programme (whether tested or not). That identification shall
include:

— model name,

— vehicle identification number (VIN),

— vehicle registration number,

— date of manufacture,

— region of use (where known),

— tyres fitted,

(b)

the reason(s) for rejecting a vehicle from the sample;

(c)

service history for each vehicle in the sample (including any re-works);

(d)

repair history for each vehicle in the sample (where known);

(e)

test data, including:

— date of test,

— location of test,

— distance indicated on vehicle odometer,

— test fuel specifications (e.g. test reference fuel or market fuel),

— test conditions (temperature, humidity, dynamometer inertia weight),

— dynamometer settings (e.g. power setting),

— test results (from at least three different vehicles per family),

1.4.12.

records of indication from the OBD system.

L 199/120

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

2.

3.

3.1.

3.2.

3.3.

3.4.

The information gathered by the manufacturer shall be sufficiently comprehensive to ensure that in-service per-
formance can be assessed for normal conditions of use as defined in section 1 and in a way representative of the
manufacturer’s geographic penetration.

For the purpose of this Regulation, the manufacturer shall not be obliged to carry out an audit of in-service con-
formity for a vehicle type if he can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the approval authority that the annual sales
of that vehicle type in the Community are less than 5 000 per annum.

On the basis of the audit referred to in Section 1.2 the approval authority shall adopt one of the following deci-
sions and actions:

(a)

decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type or a vehicle in-service family is satisfactory and not take
any further action;

(b) decide that the data provided by the manufacturer is insufficient to reach a decision and request additional

information or test data from the manufacturer;

(c)

decide that the in-service conformity of a vehicle type, that is part of an in-service family, is unsatisfactory and
proceed to have such vehicle type tested in accordance with Appendix 1 to Annex I.

Where the manufacturer has been permitted not to carry out an audit for a particular vehicle type in accordance
with Section 2, the approval authority may proceed to have such vehicle types tested in accordance with Appen-
dix 1 to Annex I.

Where type 1 tests are considered necessary to check the conformity of emission control devices with the require-
ments for their performance while in service, such tests shall be carried out using a test procedure meeting the sta-
tistical criteria defined in Appendix 2 to this Annex.

The approval authority, in cooperation with the manufacturer, shall select a sample of vehicles with sufficient mile-
age whose use under normal conditions can be reasonably assured. The manufacturer shall be consulted on the
choice of the vehicles in the sample and be allowed to attend the confirmatory checks of the vehicles.

The manufacturer shall be authorized, under the supervision of the approval authority, to carry out checks, even of
a destructive nature, on those vehicles with emission levels in excess of the limit values with a view to establishing
possible causes of deterioration which cannot be attributed to the manufacturer himself. Where the results of the
checks confirm such causes, those test results are excluded from the conformity check.

Where the approval authority is not satisfied with the results of the tests in accordance with the criteria defined in
Appendix 2, the remedial measures referred to to in Article 11(2) and in Annex X to Directive 70/156/EEC are
extended to vehicles in service belonging to the same vehicle type which are likely to be affected with the same
defects in accordance with section 6 of Appendix 1.

The plan of remedial measures presented by the manufacturer shall be approved by the approval authority. The
manufacturer is responsible for the execution of the remedial plan as approved.

The approval authority shall notify its decision to all Member States within 30 days. The Member States may require
that the same plan of remedial measures be applied to all vehicles of the same type registered in their territory.

3.5.

If a Member State has established that a vehicle type does not conform to the applicable requirements of Appen-
dix 1 to this Annex, it shall notify without delay the Member State which granted the original type-approval in
accordance with the requirements of Article 11(3) of Directive 70/156/EEC.

After that notification and subject to the provision of Article 11(6) of Directive 70/156/EEC, the competent author-
ity of the Member State which granted the original type-approval shall inform the manufacturer that a vehicle type
fails to satisfy the requirements of these provisions and that certain measures are expected of the manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall submit to the authority, within two months after this notification, a plan of measures to over-
come the defects, the substance of which should correspond to the requirements of sections 6.1 to 6,8 of Appen-
dix 1. The competent authority which granted the original type-approval shall, within two months, consult the
manufacturer in order to secure agreement on a plan of measures and on carrying out the plan. If the competent
authority which granted the original type-approval establishes that no agreement can be reached, the procedure
pursuant to Article 11(3) and (4) of Directive 70/156/EEC shall be initiated.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/121

Appendix 1

In-service conformity check

1.

INTRODUCTION

This Appendix sets out the criteria for the in-service conformity control of vehicles type-approved under Directive
70/220/EEC.

2.

SELECTION CRITERIA

2.1.

2.2.

2.3.

2.4.

The criteria for acceptance of a selected vehicle are defined in sections 2.1 to 2.8.. Information shall be collected by
the approval authority by vehicle examination and an interview with the owner/driver.

The vehicle shall belong to a vehicle type that is type-approved under Directive 70/220/EEC and covered by a cer-
tificate of conformity in accordance with Directive 70/156/EEC. The vehicle shall be registered and used in the Euro-
pean Community.

The vehicle shall have been in service for at least 15 000 km or 6 months, whichever is the later, and for no more
than 100 000 km or 5 years, whichever is the sooner.

There shall be a maintenance record to show that the vehicle has been properly maintained, e. g. has been serviced
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

The vehicle shall exhibit no indications of abuse (e. g. racing, overloading, misfuelling, or other misuse), or other
factors (e. g. tampering) that could affect emission performance. In the case of vehicles fitted with an OBD system,
the fault code and mileage information stored in the computer are taken into account. A vehicle shall not be selected
for testing if the information stored in the computer shows that the vehicle has operated after a fault code was
stored and a relatively prompt repair was not carried out.

2.5.

There shall have been no unauthorized major repair to the engine or major repair of the vehicle.

2.6.

The lead content and sulphur content of a fuel sample from the vehicle tank shall meet the applicable standards
laid down in Directive 98/70/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (1) and there shall be no evidence
of misfuelling. Checks may be done in the tailpipe etc.

2.7.

There shall be no indication of any problem that might jeopardize the safety of laboratory personnel.

2.8.

All anti-pollution system components on the vehicle shall be in conformity with the applicable type-approval.

3.

DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE

Diagnosis and any normal maintenance necessary shall be performed on vehicles accepted for testing, prior to mea-
suring exhaust emissions, in accordance with the procedure laid down in section 3.1 to 3.7.

3.1.

3.2.

The following checks shall be carried out: checks on air filter, all drive belts, all fluid levels, radiator cap, all vacuum
hoses and electrical wiring related to the antipollution system for integrity; checks on ignition, fuel metering and
pollution control device components for maladjustments and/or tampering. All discrepancies shall be recorded.

The OBD system shall be checked for proper functioning. Any malfunction indications in the OBD memory shall
be recorded and the requisite repairs shall be carried out. If the OBD malfunction indicator registers a malfunction
during a preconditioning cycle, the fault may be identified and repaired. The test may be re-run and the results of
that repaired vehicle used.

(1) OJ L 350, 28.12.1998, p. 58.

L 199/122

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.3.

The ignition system shall be checked and defective components replaced, for example spark plugs, cables, etc.

3.4.

The compression shall be checked. If the result is unsatisfactory the vehicle shall be rejected.

3.5.

The engine parameters shall be checked to the manufacturer’s specifications and adjusted if necessary.

3.6.

If the vehicle is within 800 km of a scheduled maintenance service, that service shall be performed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Regardless of odometer reading, the oil and air filter may be changed at the request of
the manufacturer.

3.7.

Upon acceptance of the vehicle, the fuel shall be replaced with appropriate emission test reference fuel, unless the
manufacturer accepts the use of market fuel.

4.

IN-SERVICE TESTING

4.1.

4.2.

4.3.

4.4.

When a check on vehicles is deemed necessary, emission tests in accordance with Annex III to Directive 70/220/EEC
shall be performed on pre-conditioned vehicles selected in accordance with the requirements of sections 2 and 3 of
this Appendix.

Vehicles equipped with an OBD system may be checked for proper in-service functionality of the malfunction indi-
cation, etc., in relation to levels of emissions (e. g. the malfunction indication limits defined in Annex XI to Direc-
tive 70/220/EEC) for the type-approved specifications.

The OBD system may be checked, for example, for levels of emissions above the applicable limit values with no
malfunction indication, systematic erroneous activation of the malfunction indication and identified faulty or dete-
riorated components in the OBD system.

If a component or system operates in a manner not covered by the particulars in the type-approval certificate and/or
information package for such vehicle types and such deviation has not been authorized under Article 5(3) or (4) of
Directive 70/156/EEC, with no malfunction indication by the OBD, the component or system shall not be replaced
prior to emission testing, unless it is determined that the component or system has been tampered with or abused
in such a manner that the OBD does not detect the resulting malfunction.

5.

EVALUATION OF RESULTS

5.1.

The test results are submitted to the evaluation procedure in accordance with Appendix 2 to this Annex.

5.2.

Test results shall not be multiplied by deterioration factors.

6.

PLAN OF REMEDIAL MEASURES

6.1.

The approval authority shall request the manufacturer to submit a plan of remedial measures to remedy the non-
compliance when more than one vehicle is found to be an outlying emitter that meets either of the following
conditions:

(a) meets the conditions set out in section 3.2.3 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and both the type-

approval authority and the manufacturer agree that the excess emission is due to the same cause, or

(b) meets the conditions set out in section 3.2.4 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation 83 and the type-approval

authority has determined that the excess emission is due to the same cause.

The plan of remedial measures shall be filed with the approval authority not later than 60 working days from the
date of the notification referred to in section 6.1. The approval authority shall within 30 working days declare its
approval or disapproval of the plan of remedial measures. However, where the manufacturer can demonstrate, to
the satisfaction of the competent approval authority, that further time is required to investigate the non-compliance
in order to submit a plan of remedial measures, an extension is granted.

The remedial measures shall apply to all vehicles likely to be affected by the same defect. The need to amend the
type-approval documents shall be assessed.

The manufacturer shall provide a copy of all communications related to the plan of remedial measures, and shall
also maintain a record of the recall campaign, and supply regular status reports to the approval authority.

6.2.

6.3.

6.4.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/123

6.5.

The plan of remedial measures shall include the requirements set out in points 6.5.1 to 6.5.11. The manufacturer
shall assign a unique identifying name or number to the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.1. A description of each vehicle type included in the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.2. A description of the specific modifications, alterations, repairs, corrections, adjustments, or other changes to be
made to bring the vehicles into conformity including a brief summary of the data and technical studies which sup-
port the manufacturer’s decision as to the particular measures to be taken to correct the non-conformity.

6.5.3. A description of the method by which the manufacturer informs the vehicle owners.

6.5.4. A description of the proper maintenance or use, if any, which the manufacturer stipulates as a condition of eligi-
bility for repair under the plan of remedial measures, and an explanation of the manufacturer’s reasons for impos-
ing any such condition. No maintenance or use conditions may be imposed unless it is demonstrably related to the
non-conformity and the remedial measures.

6.5.5. A description of the procedure to be followed by vehicle owners to obtain correction of the non-conformity. This
shall include a date after which the remedial measures may be taken, the estimated time for the workshop to per-
form the repairs and where they can be done. The repair shall be done expediently, within a reasonable time after
delivery of the vehicle.

6.5.6. A copy of the information transmitted to the vehicle owner.

6.5.7. A brief description of the system which the manufacturer uses to assure an adequate supply of component or sys-
tems for fulfilling the remedial action. It shall be indicated when there will be an adequate supply of components
or systems to initiate the campaign.

6.5.8. A copy of all instructions to be sent to those persons who are to perform the repair.

6.5.9. A description of the impact of the proposed remedial measures on the emissions, fuel consumption, driveability,
and safety of each vehicle type, covered by the plan of remedial measures with data, technical studies, etc. which
support these conclusions.

6.5.10. Any other information, reports or data the approval authority may reasonably determine is necessary to evaluate

the plan of remedial measures.

6.5.11. Where the plan of remedial measures includes a recall, a description of the method for recording the repair shall be

submitted to the approval authority. If a label is used, an example of it shall be submitted.

6.6.

6.7.

6.8.

The manufacturer may be required to conduct reasonably designed and necessary tests on components and vehicles
incorporating a proposed change, repair, or modification to demonstrate the effectiveness of the change, repair, or
modification.

The manufacturer shall be responsible for keeping a record of every vehicle recalled and repaired and the work-
shop which performed the repair. The approval authority shall have access to the record on request for a period of
5 years from the implementation of the plan of remedial measures.

The repair and/or modification or addition of new equipment shall be recorded in a certificate supplied by the
manufacturer to the vehicle owner.

L 199/124

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

Appendix 2

Statistical procedure for in-service conformity testing

1. This procedure shall be used to verify the in-service conformity requirements for the type 1 test. The applicable statis-
tical method shall be the one set out in Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, with the exceptions set out in sec-
tions 2, 3 and 4.

2. Footnote 1 shall not apply.

3.

In paragraphs 3.2.3.2.1 and 3.2.4.2 of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, the reference to paragraph 6 of Appen-
dix 3 shall be understood as reference to Section 6 of Appendix 1 to Annex XV to this Regulation.

4.

In Figure 4/1. of Appendix 4 to UN/ECE Regulation No 83, the following shall apply:

(a)

the references to paragraph 8.2.1 shall be understood as reference to Section 1.1 of Annex XV to this Regulation;

(b)

the reference to Appendix 3 shall be understood as reference to Appendix 1 of Annex XV to this Regulation;

(c)

footnote 1 shall be understood as follows: In this case, TAA means the approval authority that granted the type-
approval according to Directive 70/220/EC.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/125

REQUIREMENTS FOR VEHICLES THAT USE A REAGENT FOR THE EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM

ANNEX XVI

1.

INTRODUCTION

This Annex sets out the requirements for vehicles that rely on the use of a reagent for the aftertreatment system in
order to reduce emissions.

2.

REAGENT INDICATION

2.1.

The vehicle shall include a specific indicator on the dashboard that informs the driver of low levels of reagent in the
reagent storage tank and of when the reagent tank becomes empty.

3.

DRIVER WARNING SYSTEM

3.1.

3.2.

3.3.

3.4.

The vehicle shall include a warning system consisting of visual alarms that informs the driver when the reagent level
is low, that the tank soon needs to be refilled, or the reagent is not of a quality specified by the manufacturer. The
warning system may also include an audible component to alert the driver.

The warning system shall escalate in intensity as the reagent approaches empty. It shall culminate in a driver noti-
fication that can not be easily defeated or ignored. It shall not be possible to turn off the system until the reagent has
been replenished.

The visual warning shall display a message indicating a low level of reagent. The warning shall not be the same as
the warning used for the purposes of OBD or other engine maintenance. The warning shall be sufficiently clear for
the driver to understand that the reagent level is low (e.g. ‘urea level low’, ‘AdBlue level low’, or ‘reagent low’).

The warning system does not initially need to be continuously activated, however the warning shall escalate so that
it becomes continuous as the level of the reagent approaches the point where the driver inducement system in Sec-
tion 8 comes into effect. An explicit warning shall be displayed (e.g. ‘fill up urea’, ‘fill up AdBlue’, or ‘fill up reagent’).
The continuous warning system may be temporarily interrupted by other warning signals providing important safety
related messages.

3.5.

The warning system shall activate at a distance equivalent to a driving range of at least 2 400 km in advance to the
reagent tank becoming empty.

4.

IDENTIFICATION OF INCORRECT REAGENT

4.1.

The vehicle shall include a means of determining that a reagent corresponding to the characteristics declared by the
manufacturer and recorded in Appendix 3 to Annex I to this Regulation is present on the vehicle.

4.2.

If the reagent in the storage tank does not correspond to the minimum requirements declared by the manufacturer
the driver warning system in section 3 shall be activated and shall display a message indicating an appropriate warn-
ing (e.g. ‘incorrect urea detected’, ‘incorrect AdBlue detected’, or ‘incorrect reagent detected’). If the reagent quality is
not rectified within 50 km of the activation of the warning system then the driver inducement requirements of sec-
tion 8 shall apply.

5.

REAGENT CONSUMPTION MONITORING

5.1.

The vehicle shall include a means of determining reagent consumption and providing off-board access to consump-
tion information.

L 199/126

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

5.2.

Average reagent consumption and average demanded reagent consumption by the engine system shall be available
via the serial port of the standard diagnostic connector. Data shall be available over the previous complete 2 400 km
period of vehicle operation.

5.3.

In order to monitor reagent consumption, at least the following parameters within the vehicle shall be monitored:

(a)

the level of reagent in the on-vehicle storage tank;

(b)

the flow of reagent or injection of reagent as close as technically possible to the point of injection into an
exhaust aftertreatment system.

5.4.

5.5.

A deviation of more than 50 % between the average reagent consumption and the average demanded reagent con-
sumption by the engine system over a period of 30 minutes of vehicle operation, shall result in the activation of the
driver warning system in section 3, which shall display a message indicating an appropriate warning (e.g. ‘urea dos-
ing malfunction’, ‘AdBlue dosing malfunction’, or ‘reagent dosing malfunction’). If the reagent consumption is not
rectified within 50 km of the activation of the warning system then the driver inducement requirements of section 8
shall apply.

In the case of interruption in reagent dosing activity the driver warning system as referred to in section 3 shall be
activated, which shall display a message indicating an appropriate warning. This activation shall not be required
where the interruption is demanded by the engine ECU because the vehicle operating conditions are such that the
vehicle’s emission performance does not require reagent dosing, provided that the manufacturer has clearly informed
the approval authority when such operating conditions apply. If the reagent dosing is not rectified within 50 km of
the activation of the warning system then the driver inducement requirements of section 8 shall apply.

6.

MONITORING NOx EMISSIONS

6.1.

6.2.

As an alternative to the monitoring requirements in section 4 and 5 manufacturers may use exhaust gas sensors
directly to sense excess NOx levels in the exhaust.

The manufacturer shall demonstrate that use of these sensors and any other sensors on the vehicle, results in the
activation of the driver warning system as referred to in section 3, the display of a message indicating an appropriate
warning (e.g. ‘emissions too high — check urea’, ‘emissions too high — check AdBlue’, ‘emissions too high — check
reagen’t)., and the driver inducement system as referred to in section 8.3, when the situations referred to in sec-
tion 4.2, 5.4.or 5,5 occur.

7.

STORAGE OF FAILURE INFORMATION

7.1. Where reference is made to this section, a non-erasable Parameter Identifier (PID) shall be stored identifying the rea-
son for the inducement system activation. The vehicle shall retain a record of the PID and the distance travelled by
the vehicle during the inducement system activation for at least 800 days or 30 000 km of vehicle operation. The
PID shall be made available via the serial port of a standard diagnostic connector upon request of a generic scan tool.

7.2. Malfunctions in the reagent dosing system attributed to technical failures (e.g. mechanical or electrical faults) shall

also be subject to the OBD requirements in Annex XI.

8.

DRIVER INDUCEMENT SYSTEM

8.1.

8.2.

The vehicle shall include a driver inducement system to ensure that the vehicle operates with a functioning emis-
sions control system at all times. The inducement system shall be designed so as to ensure that the vehicle can not
operate with an empty reagent tank.

The inducement system shall activate at the latest when the level of reagent in the tank reaches a level equivalent to
the average driving range of the vehicle with a complete tank of fuel. The system shall also activate when the failures
in sections 4, 5 or 6 have occurred, depending on the NOx monitoring approach. The detection of an empty reagent
tank and the failures mentioned in sections 4, 5 or 6 shall result in the failure information storage requirements of
section 7 coming into effect.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/127

8.3.

The manufacturer shall select which type of inducement system to install. The options for a system are described in
following points 8.3.1, 8.3.2, 8.3.3 and 8.3.4.

8.3.1. A ‘no engine restart after countdown’ approach allows a countdown of restarts or distance remaining once the
inducement system activates. Engine starts initiated by the vehicle control system, such as start-stop systems, are not
included in this countdown. Engine restarts shall be prevented immediately after the reagent tank becomes empty or
a distance equivalent to a complete tank of fuel has been exceeded since the activation of the inducement system,
whichever occurs earlier.

8.3.2. A ‘no start after refuelling’ system results in a vehicle being unable to start after re-fuelling if the inducement system

has activated.

8.3.3. A ‘fuel-lockout’ approach prevents the vehicle from being refuelled by locking the fuel filler system after the induce-

ment system activates. The lockout system shall be robust to prevent it being tampered with.

8.3.4. A ‘performance restriction’ approach restricts the speed of the vehicle after the inducement system activates. The level
of speed limitation shall be noticeable to the driver and significantly reduce the maximum speed of the vehicle. Such
limitation shall enter into operation gradually or after an engine start. Shortly before engine restarts are prevented,
the speed of the vehicle shall not exceed 50 km/h. Engine restarts shall be prevented immediately after the reagent
tank becomes empty or a distance equivalent to a complete tank of fuel has been exceeded since the activation of
inducement system, whichever occurs earlier.

8.4.

Once the inducement system has fully activated and disabled the vehicle, the inducement system shall only be deac-
tivated if the quantity of reagent added to the vehicle is equivalent to 2 400 km average driving range, or the failures
specified in sections 4, 5, or 6 have been rectified. After a repair has been carried out to correct a fault where the
OBD system has been triggered under point 7.2, the inducement system may be reinitialised via the OBD serial port
(e.g. by a generic scan tool) to enable the vehicle to be restarted for self-diagnosis purposes. The vehicle shall operate
for a maximum of 50 km to enable the success of the repair to be validated. The inducement system shall be fully
reactivated if the fault persists after this validation.

8.5.

The driver warning system referred to in section 3 shall display a message indicating clearly:

(a)

the number of remaining restarts and/or the remaining distance; and

(b)

the conditions under which the vehicle can be restarted.

8.6.

The driver inducement system shall be deactivated when the conditions for its activation have ceased to exist. The
driver inducement system shall not be automatically deactivated without the reason for its activation having been
remedied.

8.7.

Detailed written information fully describing the functional operation characteristics of the driver inducement sys-
tem shall be provided to the approval authority at the time of approval.

8.8.

As part of the application for type-approval under this Regulation, the manufacturer shall demonstrate the opera-
tion of the driver warning and inducement systems.

9.

INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS

9.1.

The manufacturer shall provide all owners of new vehicles written information about the emission control system.
This information shall state that if the vehicle emission control system is not functioning correctly, the driver shall
be informed of a problem by the driver warning system and that the driver inducement system shall consequentially
result in the vehicle being unable to start.

9.2.

The instructions shall indicate requirements for the proper use and maintenance of vehicles, including the proper
use of consumable reagents.

9.3.

The instructions shall specify if consumable reagents have to be refilled by the vehicle operator between normal
maintenance intervals. They shall indicate how the driver should refill the reagent tank. The information shall also
indicate a likely rate of reagent consumption for that type of vehicle and how often it should be replenished.

L 199/128

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

9.4.

9.5.

9.6.

The instructions shall specify that use of, and refilling of, a required reagent of the correct specifications is manda-
tory for the vehicle to comply with the certificate of conformity issued for that vehicle type.

The instructions shall state that it may be a criminal offence to use a vehicle that does not consume any reagent if it
is required for the reduction of emissions.

The instructions shall explain how the warning system and driver inducement systems work. In addition, the con-
sequences of ignoring the warning system and not replenishing the reagent shall be explained.

10.

OPERATING CONDITIONS OF THE AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM

Manufacturers shall ensure that the emission control system retains its emission control function during all ambient
conditions regularly found in the European Union, especially at low ambient temperatures. This includes taking mea-
sures to prevent the complete freezing of the reagent during parking times of up to 7 days at 258 K (– 15 °C) with
the reagent tank 50 % full. If the reagent has frozen, the manufacturer shall ensure that reagent shall be available for
use within 20 minutes of the vehicle starting at 258 K (– 15 °C) measured inside the reagent tank, so as to ensure
correct operation of the emission control system.

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/129

ANNEX XVII

AMENDMENTS TO REGULATION (EC) No 715/2007

Regulation (EC) No 715/2007 is amended as follows:

1. The following paragraph 6 shall be added to Article 10:

‘6. The 5,0 mg/km emission limit for mass of particulate matter referred to in Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I shall be effec-
tive from the applicable dates set out in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3.

The 4,5 mg/km emission limit for mass of particulate matter and the particle number limit referred to in Tables 1 and 2
of Annex I shall be effective from 1 September 2011 for the type-approval on new types of vehicles and from 1 January
2013 for all new vehicles sold, registered or put into service in the Community.’

2. Tables 1 and 2 of Annex I are replaced by the following tables:

‘Table 1
Euro 5 Emission Limits

Limit values

Reference mass
(RM)
(kg)

Mass of carbon mon-
oxide
(CO)

Mass of total hydrocar-
bons
(THC)

Mass of non-
methane hydrocar-
bons
(NMHC)

Mass of oxides of
nitrogen
(NOx)

Combined mass of
hydrocarbons and
oxides of nitrogen
(THC + NOx)

Mass of particulate
matter (1)
(PM)

Number of particles (2)
(P)

L1
(mg/km)

L2
(mg/km)

L3
(mg/km)

L4
(mg/km)

L2 + L4
(mg/km)

L5
(mg/km)

L6
(#/km)

Category

Class

PI

CI

PI

CI

M

N1

RM ≤ 1 305
1 305 < RM ≤ 1 760
1 760 < RM

— All
I
II
III
— All
Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition
(1) A revised measurement procedure shall be introduced before the application of the 4,5 mg/km limit value.
(2) A new measurement procedure shall be introduced before the application of the limit value.
(3) Positive ignition particulate mass standards shall apply only to vehicles with direct injection engines.

1 000
1 000
1 810
2 270
2 270

100
100
130
160
160

500
500
630
740
740

—
—
—
—
—

N2

PI

68
68
90
108
108

CI

—
—
—
—
—

PI

60
60
75
82
82

CI

180
180
235
280
280

PI

—
—
—
—
—

CI

230
230
295
350
350

PI (3)

CI

5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5

PI

—
—
—
—
—

CI

6,0 x 1011
6,0 × 1011
6,0 × 1011
6,0 × 1011
6,0 × 1011

Table 2

Euro 6 Emission Limits

Limit values

Reference mass
(RM)
(kg)

Mass of carbon mon-
oxide
(CO)

Mass of total hydrocar-
bons
(THC)

Mass of non-
methane hydrocar-
bons
(NMHC)

Mass of oxides of
nitrogen
(NOx)

Combined mass of
hydrocarbons and
oxides of nitrogen
(THC + NOx)

Mass of particulate
matter (1)
(PM)

Number of particles (2)
(P)

L1
(mg/km)

L2
(mg/km)

L3
(mg/km)

L4
(mg/km)

L2 + L4
(mg/km)

L5
(mg/km)

L6
(#/km)

L

1
9
9
/
1
3
0

E
N

O

f
f
i
c
i
a
l

J
o
u
r
n
a
l

o
f

t
h
e

E
u
r
o
p
e
a
n
U
n
o
n

i

Category

Class

PI

CI

PI

CI

M

N1

N2

1 000
1 000
1 810
2 270
2 270

RM ≤ 1 305
1 305 < RM ≤ 1 760
1 760 < RM

— All
I
II
III
— All
Key: PI = Positive Ignition, CI = Compression Ignition
(1) A revised measurement procedure shall be introduced before the application of the 4,5 mg/km limit value.
(2) A number standard is to be defined for this stage for positive ignition vehicles.
(3) Positive ignition particulate mass standards shall apply only to vehicles with direct injection engines.
(4) A number standard shall be defined before 1 September 2014.’
(5) A new measurement procedure shall be introduced before the application of the limit value.

100
100
130
160
160

500
500
630
740
740

—
—
—
—
—

PI

68
68
90
108
108

CI

—
—
—
—
—

PI

60
60
75
82
82

CI

80
80
105
125
125

PI

—
—
—
—
—

CI

170
170
195
215
215

PI (3)

CI

PI (4)

CI (5)

5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5

5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5
5,0/4,5

6,0 × 1011
6,0 × 1011
6,0 × 1011
6,0 × 1011
6,0 × 1011

.

.

2
8
7
2
0
0
8

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/131

ANNEX XVIII

SPECIAL PROVISIONS REGARDING ANNEX I TO COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 70/156/EEC

3.2.1.1.

Working principle: positive ignition/compression ignition (1)

Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1)

3.2.2.

Fuel: Diesel/Petrol/LPG/NG-Biomethane/Ethanol(E85)/Biodiesel/Hydrogen Four stroke/two stroke/rotary
cycle (1)

3.2.2.4.

Vehicle fuel type: Mono fuel, Bi fuel, Flex fuel Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1)

3.2.2.5.

Maximum amount of biofuel acceptable in fuel (manufacturer’s declared value): . . . . . . . . . . . . % by volume’

3.2.4.2.3.3.

Maximum fuel delivery Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1) (2): . mm3/stroke or cycle at an engine speed
of: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min-1 or, alternatively, a characteristic diagram: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.

Electronic controlled injection: yes/no (1)

3.2.4.2.9.2.

Type(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

3.2.4.2.9.3.

Description of the system, in the case of systems other than continuous injection give equivalent details:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.1.

Make and type of the control unit:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.2.

Make and type of the fuel regulator:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.3.

Make and type of air-flow sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.4.

Make and type of fuel distributor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.5.

Make and type of throttle housing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.6.

Make and type of water temperature sensor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.7.

Make and type of air temperature sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.2.9.3.8.

Make and type of air pressure sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

3.2.4.3.4.

System description, in the case of systems other than continuous injection give equivalent details: . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.1.

Make and type of the control unit:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.3.

Make and type of air-flow sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.6.

Make and type of micro switch:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.8.

Make and type of throttle housing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.9.

Make and type of water temperature sensor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.10.

Make and type of air temperature sensor:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.4.11.

Make and type of air pressure sensor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4.3.5.1.

Make(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)
(2) Specify the tolerance.

L 199/132

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.2.4.3.5.2.

Type(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8.2.1.

Type: air-air/air-water (1)

3.2.8.3.

Intake depression at rated engine speed and at 100 % load (compression ignition engines only)

Minimum allowable: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

Maximum allowable:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa

3.2.9.3.

Maximum allowable exhaust back pressure at rated engine speed and at 100 % load (compression igni-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kPa
tion engines only):

3.2.11.1.

Maximum lift of valves, angles of opening and closing, or timing details of alternative distribution sys-
tems, in relation to dead centres. For variable timing system, minimum and maximum timing: . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.

Additional pollution control devices (if any, and if not covered by another heading)

3.2.12.2.1.1.

Number of catalytic converters and elements (provide the information below for each separate unit):

. . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.

Regeneration systems/method of exhaust after-treatment systems, description: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.1. The number of Type 1 operating cycles, or equivalent engine test bench cycles, between two cycles where
regenerative phases occur under the conditions equivalent to Type 1 test (Distance ‘D’ in figure 1 in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83):

3.2.12.2.1.11.2. Description of method employed to determine the number of cycles between two cycles where regenera-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tive phases occur:

3.2.12.2.1.11.3. Parameters to determine the level of loading required before regeneration occurs (i.e. temperature, pres-
sure etc.): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.4. Description of method used to load system in the test procedure described in paragraph 3.1., Annex 13
to UN/ECE Regulation 83: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.5. Normal operating temperature range (K):

3.2.12.2.1.11.6. Consumable reagents (where appropriate):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.7. Type and concentration of reagent needed for catalytic action (where appropriate):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.8. Normal operational temperature range of reagent (where appropriate): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.1.11.9.

International standard (where appropriate):

3.2.12.2.1.11.10. Frequency of reagent refill: continuous/maintenance (1) (where appropriate)

3.2.12.2.1.12.

Make of catalytic converter:

3.2.12.2.1.13.

Identifying part number:

3.2.12.2.2.4.

Make of oxygen sensor:

3.2.12.2.2.5.

Identifying part number:

3.2.12.2.4.2.

Water cooled system: yes/no (1)

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/133

3.2.12.2.6.4.1.

The number of Type 1 operating cycles, or equivalent engine test bench cycle, between two cycles where
regeneration phases occur under the conditions equivalent to Type 1 test (Distance ‘D’ in figure 1 in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annex 13 to UN/ECE Regulation 83):

3.2.12.2.6.4.2.

Description of method employed to determine the number of cycles between two cycles where regenera-
tive phases occur: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.4.3.

Parameters to determine the level of loading required before regeneration occurs (i.e. temperature, pres-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sure, etc.):

3.2.12.2.6.4.4.

Description of method used to load system in the test procedure described in paragraph 3.1., Annex 13
to UN/ECE Regulation 83: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.12.2.6.5.

Make of particulate trap:

3.2.12.2.6.6.

Identifying part number:

3.2.12.2.7.6.

The following additional information shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer for the purposes of
enabling the manufacture of OBD- compatible replacement or service parts and diagnostic tools and test
equipment.

3.2.12.2.7.6.1.

A description of the type and number of the pre-conditioning cycles used for the original type-approval
of the vehicle.

3.2.12.2.7.6.2.

A description of the type of the OBD demonstration cycle used for the original type-approval of the vehicle
for the component monitored by the OBD system.

3.2.12.2.7.6.3.

A comprehensive document describing all sensed components with the strategy for fault detection and
MI activation (fixed number of driving cycles or statistical method), including a list of relevant secondary
sensed parameters for each component monitored by the OBD system. A list of all OBD output codes and
format used (with an explanation of each) associated with individual emission related power-train com-
ponents and individual non-emission related components, where monitoring of the component is used
to determine MI activation. In particular, a comprehensive explanation for the data given in service $05
Test ID $21 to FF and the data given in service $06 shall be provided. In the case of vehicle types that use
a communication link in accordance with ISO 15765-4 ‘Road vehicles diagnostics on controller area net-
work (CAN) — part 4: requirements for emissions-related systems’, a comprehensive explanation for the
data given in service $06 Test ID $00 to FF, for each OBD monitor ID supported, shall be provided.

3.2.12.2.7.6.4.

The information required by this section may, be defined by completing a table as follows,

Component

Fault code

Catalyst

PO420

MI activa-
tion crite-
ria

3rd cycle

Monitor-
ing strat-
egy

Oxygen
sensor 1
and 2
signals

Fault detec-
tion criteria

Difference
between
sensor 1
and sen-
sor 2 sig-
nals

Secondary
parameters

Precondi-
tioning

Demonstra-
tion test

Type 1

Two
Type 1
cycles

Engine
speed,
engine
load, A/F
mode,
catalyst
tempera-
ture

3.2.15.1.

EC type-approval number according to Council Directive 70/221/EEC (OJ L 76, 6.4.1970, p. 23) (when
the Directive will be amended to cover tanks for gaseous fuels) or approval number of UN/ECE Regula-
tion 67’

3.2.16.1.

EC type-approval number according to Directive 70/221/EEC (when the Directive will be amended to
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .’
cover tanks for gaseous fuels) or approval number of UN/ECE Regulation 110:

3.4.

Engines or motor combinations

3.4.1.

Hybrid Electric Vehicle: yes/no (1)

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

L 199/134

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

3.4.2.

Category of Hybrid Electric vehicle

Off Vehicle Charging/Not Off Vehicle Charging (1)

3.4.3.

Operating mode switch: with/without (1)

3.4.3.1.

Selectable modes

3.4.3.1.1.

Pure electric: yes/no (1)

3.4.3.1.2.

Pure fuel consuming: yes/no (1)

3.4.3.1.3.

Hybrid modes: yes/no (1)

(if yes, short description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.

Description of the energy storage device: (battery, capacitor, flywheel/generator)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.1.

Make(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.2.

Type(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.3.

Identification number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.4.

Kind of electrochemical couple: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4.5.

Energy:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (for battery: voltage and capacity Ah in 2 h, for capacitor: J, …)

3.4.4.6.

Charger: on board/external/without (1)

3.4.5.

Electric machines (describe each type of electric machine separately)

3.4.5.1.

Make:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.5.2.

Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.5.3.

Primary use: traction motor/generator

3.4.5.3.1.

When used as traction motor: monomotor/multimotors (number):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.5.4.

Maximum power: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW

3.4.5.5.

Working principle:

3.4.5.5.1.

direct current/alternating current/number of phases:

3.4.5.5.2.

separate excitation/series/compound (1)

3.4.5.5.3.

synchronous/asynchronous (1)

3.4.6.

Control unit

3.4.6.1.

Make(s):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.6.2.

Type(s): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.6.3.

Identification number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.7.

Power controller

3.4.7.1.

Make:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable.)

28.7.2008

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 199/135

3.4.7.2.

Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.7.6.3.

Identification number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.8.

3.4.9.

3.5.2.

6.6.1.

9.1.

16.

Vehicle electric range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km (according to Annex 7 of Regulation No 101)

Manufacturer’s recommendation for preconditioning: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel consumption (provide for each reference fuel tested)

Tyre/wheel combination(s)

(a) for all tyre options indicate size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling resis-

tance to ISO 28580 (where applicable)

(b) for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h

equivalent information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s)

Type of bodywork: (use codes defined in Annex II, section C): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

16.1.

Address of principal website for access to vehicle repair and maintenance information:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.1.1.

Date from which it is available (no later than 6 months from the date of type approval): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.2.

16.3.

Terms and conditions of access to website referred to in Section 16.1:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Format of vehicle repair and maintenance information accessible through website referred to in Sec-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tion 16.1:

L 199/136

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

28.7.2008

SPECIAL PROVISIONS REGARDING ANNEX III TO COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 70/156/EEC

ANNEX XIX

3.2.1.1. Working principle: positive ignition/compression ignition (1)

Four stroke/two stroke/rotary cycle (1)

3.2.2.

Fuel: Diesel/Petrol/LPG/NG-Biomethane/Ethanol(E85)/Biodiesel/Hydrogen (1)

3.2.2.4. Vehicle fuel type: Mono fuel, Bi fuel, Flex fuel (1)

3.2.2.5. Maximum amount of biofuel acceptable in fuel (manufacturer’s declared value): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .% by volume

3.2.12.2. Additional pollution control devices (if any, and if not covered by another heading)

3.4.

Engines or motor combinations

3.4.1.

Hybrid Electric Vehicle: yes/no (1)

3.4.2.

Category of Hybrid Electric vehicle

Off Vehicle Charging/Not Off Vehicle Charging (1)

6.6.1.

Tyre/wheel combination(s)

(a) for all tyre options indicate size designation, load-capacity index, speed category symbol, rolling resistance to
ISO 28580 (where applicable)

(b) for tyres of category Z intended to be fitted on vehicles whose maximum speed exceeds 300 km/h equivalent
information shall be provided; for wheels indicate rim size(s) and off-set(s)

9.1. Type of bodywork: (use codes defined in section C of Annex II):

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.

Access to vehicle repair and maintenance information

16.1. Address of principal website for access to vehicle repair and maintenance information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1) Delete where not applicable (there are cases where nothing needs to be deleted when more than one entry is applicable)